Seabee Combat Manual Vol 2

DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A: Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.
NONRESIDENT
TRAINING
COURSE
March 1996
Seabee Combat
Handbook, Volume 2
NAVEDTRA 14235
DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A: Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.
Although the words he, him, and
his are used sparingly in this course to
enhance communication, they are not
intended to be gender driven or to affront or
discriminate against anyone.
COMMANDING OFFICER
NETPTDC
6490 SAUFLEY FIELD ROAD
Errata #2
PENSACOLA, FL 32509-5237
Specific Instruction and Errata for
Nonresident Training Course
07 May 01
SEABEE COMBAT HANDBOOK, VOLUME 2, NAVEDTRA 14235
1. This errata supersedes all previous errata. NO attempt has been made to
issue corrections for errors in typing, punctuation, etc., that do not affect
your ability to answer the question or questions.
2. To receive credit for deleted questions, show this errata to your local
course administrator (ESO/scorer). The local course administrator is directed
to correct the course and the answer key by indicating the questions deleted.
3. Assignment Booklet, NAVEDTRA 14235
Delete the following questions and leave the corresponding spaces blank
on the answer sheets:
Question
1-43
2-10
2-56
3-34
4. Change the following items in the Assignment Booklet, NAVEDTRA 14235:
a. Question 4-9 page 19; change the question's stem to read "The
depth of a platoon defense is the distance between the squad's primary
positions and the rearward extension of what other position?"
b. Question 4-57 page 23; change the question's stem to read "...
occupied by the convoy commander?"
C. Change figure 5B, item C, page 27 to read "Immediate Assault
Drill."
d. Question 6-33 page 33; change the question's stem to read "...
conducting detailed troop decon (DTD)?"
e. Question 6-46 page 34; change the question's stem to read "... a
sanitizing solution at station 7, . . . ."
f. Question 6-58 page 35; change the question's stem to read "... the
primary task of DED station 4?"

i
PREFACE
By enrolling in this self-study course, you have demonstrated a desire to improve yourself and the Navy.
Remember, however, this self-study course is only one part of the total Navy training program. Practical
experience, schools, selected reading, and your desire to succeed are also necessary to successfully round
out a fully meaningful training program.
THE COURSE: This self-study course is organized into subject matter areas, each containing learning
objectives to help you determine what you should learn along with text and illustrations to help you
understand the information. The subject matter reflects day-to-day requirements and experiences of
personnel in the rating or skill area. It also reflects guidance provided by Enlisted Community Managers
(ECMs) and other senior personnel, technical references, instructions, etc., and either the occupational or
naval standards, which are listed in the Manual of Navy Enlisted Manpower Personnel Classifications
and Occupational Standards, NAVPERS 18068.
THE QUESTIONS: The questions that appear in this course are designed to help you understand the
material in the text.
VALUE: In completing this course, you will improve your military and professional knowledge.
Importantly, it can also help you study for the Navy-wide advancement in rate examination. If you are
studying and discover a reference in the text to another publication for further information, look it up.
1996 Edition Prepared by
EOC Ricky P. Baptista
Published by
NAVAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING
PROFESSIONAL DEVELOPMENT
AND TECHNOLOGY CENTER
NAVSUP Logistics Tracking Number
0504-LP-026-8730
ii
Sailors Creed
I am a United States Sailor.
I will support and defend the
Constitution of the United States of
America and I will obey the orders
of those appointed over me.
I represent the fighting spirit of the
Navy and those who have gone
before me to defend freedom and
democracy around the world.
I proudly serve my countrys Navy
combat team with honor, courage
and commitment.
I am committed to excellence and
the fair treatment of all.
CONTENTS
CHAPTER
PAGE
1. Organi zati on and Operati on of the Combat Operati ons Center . . . 1-1
2. Organi zati on and Operati on of the Company Command Post . . . . 2-1
3. Setup and Control of Medi cal Evacuati on (MEDEVAC) . . . . . . 3-1
4. Pl anni ng and Devel opment of Defense Tacti cs . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
5. Counter Ambush Techni ques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
6. CBR Decontami nati on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
APPENDI X
I . Gl ossary of Common Mi l i tary Terms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AI -1
I I . Overl ay Techni ques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AI I -1
I I I . Characteri sti cs of TOA Weapons for an NMCB . . . . . . . . . AI I I -1
I V. Decontami nants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AI V-1
V. Decontami nati on of Speci fi c I tems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV-1
VI . Work/Rest Tabl e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AVI -1
VI I . Acronyms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AVI I -1
VI I I . References Used to Devel op Thi s TRAMAN . . . . . . . . . AVI I I -1
I NDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I NDEX-1
. . .
iii
SUMMARY OF
SEABEE COMBAT HANDBOOK
TRAINING MANUALS
VOLUME 1
Seabee Combat Handbook, Vol ume 1, NAVEDTRA 12003, consi sts of chapters
on the Hi story and Organi zati on of the Seabees and Laws of War; Speci al Cl othi ng
and Equi pment; Servi ce Ri fl e and Pi stol Marksmanshi p; Combat Maneuvers,
Formati on, Patrol s, and Ambushes; Land Navi gati on; Evasi on, Survi val , and
Escape; I ndi vi dual Protecti on Measures; Entangl ements; Chemi cal , Bi ol ogi cal , and
Radi ol ogi cal (CBR) Defense; Fi r st Ai d and Fi el d Sani tati on; Or gani c
Communi cati ons Equi pment; Hand Grenades, Land Mi nes, and Booby Traps;
Organi c Support Weapons: M203 and Machi ne Guns; and Organi c Support
Weapons: 60mm Mortar and AT4.
VOLUME 2
Seabee Combat Handbook, Vol ume 2, NAVEDTRA 12004, consi sts of chapters
on Organi zati on and Operati on of the Combat Operati ons Center; Organi zati on and
Operati on of the Company Command Post; Setup and Control of Medi cal
Evacuati on (MEDEVAC); Pl anni ng and Devel opment of Defense Tacti cs; Counter
Ambush Techni ques; and CBR Decontami nati on.
iv
v
INSTRUCTIONS FOR TAKING THE COURSE
ASSIGNMENTS
The text pages that you are to study are listed at
the beginning of each assignment. Study these
pages carefully before attempting to answer the
questions. Pay close attention to tables and
illustrations and read the learning objectives.
The learning objectives state what you should be
able to do after studying the material. Answering
the questions correctly helps you accomplish the
objectives.
SELECTING YOUR ANSWERS
Read each question carefully, then select the
BEST answer. You may refer freely to the text.
The answers must be the result of your own
work and decisions. You are prohibited from
referring to or copying the answers of others and
from giving answers to anyone else taking the
course.
SUBMITTING YOUR ASSIGNMENTS
To have your assignments graded, you must be
enrolled in the course with the Nonresident
Training Course Administration Branch at the
Naval Education and Training Professional
Development and Technology Center
(NETPDTC). Following enrollment, there are
two ways of having your assignments graded:
(1) use the Internet to submit your assignments
as you complete them, or (2) send all the
assignments at one time by mail to NETPDTC.
Grading on the Internet: Advantages to
Internet grading are:
you may submit your answers as soon as
you complete an assignment, and
you get your results faster; usually by the
next working day (approximately 24 hours).
In addition to receiving grade results for each
assignment, you will receive course completion
confirmation once you have completed all the
assignments. To submit your assignment
answers via the Internet, go to:
http://courses.cnet.navy.mil
Grading by Mail: When you submit answer
sheets by mail, send all of your assignments at
one time. Do NOT submit individual answer
sheets for grading. Mail all of your assignments
in an envelope, which you either provide
yourself or obtain from your nearest Educational
Services Officer (ESO). Submit answer sheets
to:
COMMANDING OFFICER
NETPDTC N331
PENSACOLA FL 32559-5000
Answer Sheets: All courses include one
scannable answer sheet for each assignment.
These answer sheets are preprinted with your
SSN, name, assignment number, and course
number. Explanations for completing the answer
sheets are on the answer sheet.
Do not use answer sheet reproductions: Use
only the original answer sheets that we
providereproductions will not work with our
scanning equipment and cannot be processed.
Follow the instructions for marking your
answers on the answer sheet. Be sure that blocks
1, 2, and 3 are filled in correctly. This
information is necessary for your course to be
properly processed and for you to receive credit
for your work.
COMPLETION TIME
Courses must be completed within 12 months
from the date of enrollment. This includes time
required to resubmit failed assignments.
vi
PASS/FAIL ASSIGNMENT PROCEDURES
If your overall course score is 3.2 or higher, you
will pass the course and will not be required to
resubmit assignments. Once your assignments
have been graded you will receive course
completion confirmation.
If you receive less than a 3.2 on any assignment
and your overall course score is below 3.2, you
will be given the opportunity to resubmit failed
assignments. You may resubmit failed
assignments only once. Internet students will
receive notification when they have failed an
assignment--they may then resubmit failed
assignments on the web site. Internet students
may view and print results for failed
assignments from the web site. Students who
submit by mail will receive a failing result letter
and a new answer sheet for resubmission of each
failed assignment.
COMPLETION CONFIRMATION
After successfully completing this course, you
will receive a letter of completion.
ERRATA
Errata are used to correct minor errors or delete
obsolete information in a course. Errata may
also be used to provide instructions to the
student. If a course has an errata, it will be
included as the first page(s) after the front cover.
Errata for all courses can be accessed and
viewed/downloaded at:
http:/ / www. advancement. cnet. navy. mi l
STUDENT FEEDBACK QUESTIONS
We value your suggestions, questions, and
criticisms on our courses. If you would like to
communicate with us regarding this course, we
encourage you, if possible, to use e-mail. If you
write or fax, please use a copy of the Student
Comment form that follows this page.
For subject matter questions:
E-mail: n314.products@cnet.navy.mil
Phone: Comm: (850) 452-1001, Ext. 1826
DSN: 922-1001, Ext. 1826
FAX: (850) 452-1370
(Do not fax answer sheets.)
Address: COMMANDING OFFICER
NETPDTC (CODE N314)
For enrollment, shipping, grading, or
completion letter questions
E-mail: fleetservices@cnet.navy.mil
Phone: Toll Free: 877-264-8583
Comm: (850) 452-1511/1181/1859
DSN: 922-1511/1181/1859
FAX: (850) 452-1370
(Do not fax answer sheets.)
Address: COMMANDING OFFICER
NETPDTC (CODE N331)
NAVAL RESERVE RETIREMENT CREDIT
If you are a member of the Naval Reserve, you
will receive retirement points if you are
authorized to receive them under current
directives governing retirement of Naval
Reserve personnel. For Naval Reserve
retirement, this course is evaluated at 9 points.
(Refer to Administrative Procedures for Naval
Reservists on Inactive Duty, BUPERSINST
1001.39, for more information about retirement
points.)
COURSE OBJECTIVES
In completing this nonresident training course,
you will demonstrate a knowledge of the subject
matter by correctly answering questions on the
following: Organization and Operation of the
Combat Operations Center; Organization and
Operation of the Company Command Post;
Setup and Control of Medical Evacuation
(MEDEVAC); Planning and Development of
Defense Tactics; Counter Ambush Techniques;
and CBR Decontamination.
vii
Student Comments
Course Title: Seabee Combat Handbook, Volume 2
NAVEDTRA: 14235 Date:
We need some information about you:
Rate/Rank and Name: SSN: Command/Unit
Street Address: City: State/FPO: Zip
Your comments, suggestions, etc.:
Privacy Act Statement: Under authority of Title 5, USC 301, information regarding your military status is
requested in processing your comments and in preparing a reply. This information will not be divulged without
written authorization to anyone other than those within DOD for official use in determining performance.
NETPDTC 1550/41 (Rev 4-00)
CHAPTER 1
ORGANIZATION AND OPERATION OF THE COMBAT
OPERATIONS CENTER
Effi ci entl y organi zed and executed command and seven pri mary engi neer (fi g. 1-1) assets spread out
contr ol oper ati ons ar e essenti al for any combat among the el ements.
operati on to be successful . Many battl es have been
l ost because of poor executi on of command and
control acti vi ti es. A major reason for the success of
Operati on Desert Storm was the manner each uni t
mai ntai ned and supported a vi gorous command and
control structure.
A comprehensi ve knowl edge about hi gher and
l ower echel ons i n the area of operati ons assi gned to a
Seabee battal i on i s cruci al to personnel executi ng
command and contr ol functi ons. Thi s chapter
pr ovi des detai l ed i nfor mati on on the Combat
Operati ons Center (COC). Al so, descri bed i n thi s
chapter i s the Mar i ne Ai r -Gr ound Task For ce
(MAGTF).
NOTE: Duri ng combat operati ons, Seabee uni ts
are normal l y assi gned to a MAGTF.
ORGANIZATION OF THE MARINE
AIR-GROUND TASK FORCE (MAGTF)
A Mari ne Ai r-Ground Task Force (MAGTF) i s
normal l y formed for combat operati ons i n whi ch
substanti al Mari ne avi ati on and Mari ne ground uni ts
parti ci pate. Trends i n nati onal strategy show that the
most probabl e empl oyment of MAGTFs wi l l be i n the
e x e cu t i on of f or ce - i n - r e a d i n e s s mi s s i on s .
Accompl i shment of such mi ssi ons r equi r es the
empl oyment of MAGTFs as l andi ng for ces i n
amphi bi ous operati ons and l ater operati ons ashore.
The MAGTFs must have the capabi l i ty i n such
commi tments to operate i n cl ose coordi nati on wi th
other U.S. Armed Forces and the forces of Al l i ed
nati ons. MAGTFs are characteri zed by operati onal
concepts, organi zati onal structures, equi pment, and
s y s tems th at ar e s u i ted for empl oy men t i n
Navy-Mari ne, joi nt, or combi ned operati ons.
The fact that a Seabee battal i on i s attached to a
MAGTF duri ng combat makes i t cri ti cal that you
understand the MAGTF organi zati on. No matter how
l arge, a MAGTF consi sts of at l east four el ements wi th
The four el ements (fi g. 1-2) are as fol l ows:
. Command El ement (CE)
. Ground Combat El ement (GCE)
. Avi ati on Combat El ement (ACE)
. Combat Servi ce Support El ement (CSSE)
Figure 1-1.Primary MAGTF Engineer Assets.
Figure 1-2.Elements of a MAGTF organization.
1-1
COMMAND ELEMENT (CE)
The Command El ement (CE) i s the MAGTF
headquarters and i s establ i shed for effecti ve pl anni ng
and executi on. I t extends and compl ements the
capabi l i ti es of subordi nate MAGTF el ements but do
not dupl i cate them under normal ci rcumstances.
Di rect l i ai son among the four el ements i s desi rabl e to
achi eve the necessary coordi nati on requi red for the
effecti ve conduct of ai r-ground operati ons.
A CEC offi cer i s attached to the Command
El ement, engi neer staff. The CEC offi cer serves as an
advi sor to the MAGTF engi neer offi cer on matters
rel ati ng to the capabi l i ti es and empl oyment of the
Naval Constructi on Force. A l arge porti on of the
MAGTF Command El ement i s concer ned wi th
matters i nvol vi ng hi gher, adjacent, and supporti ng
commands.
GROUND COMBAT ELEMENT (GCE)
The Ground Combat El ement (GCE) i s a task
or gani zati on tai l or ed for the conduct of gr ound
maneuver operati ons. The GCE i s constructed around
a combat i nfantry uni t, and i t al so i ncl udes appropri ate
combat support and combat servi ce support (CSS)
uni ts.
Normal l y, there i s onl y one GCE i n the MAGTF.
A requi rement for more than one GCE may occur i n
cer tai n oper ati onal si tuati ons, such as joi nt or
combi ned operati ons.
AVIATION COMBAT ELEMENT (ACE)
Normal l y, there i s onl y one Avi ati on Combat
El ement (ACE) i n a MAGTF. Thi s el ement i s
task -or gani zed for the conduct of tacti cal ai r
oper ati ons. I t i ncl udes the avi ati on commands
(i ncl udi ng ai r control agenci es), combat support, and
combat servi ce support uni ts requi red for the mi ssi on.
The vari ed avi ati on resources of a Mari ne Ai rcraft
Wi ng (MAW) and appropri ate force uni ts provi de
these capabi l i ti es.
At the Mari ne Expedi ti onary Force (MEF) and
Mari ne Expedi ti onary Force-Forward (MEF-F) l evel ,
the ACE i ncl udes both fi xed-wi ng and hel i copter
assets as wel l as an ai r defense capabi l i ty.
Ai r operati ons are conducted under the pri nci pl e
of central i zed control at the MAGTF l evel . When the
MAGTF commander assumes r esponsi bi l i ty for
control of ai r operati ons, he or she exerci ses control
through faci l i ti es provi ded by the ACE. He normal l y
appoi nts the commander of the ACE to act as the
MAGTF tacti cal ai r commander (TAC).
COMBAT SERVICE SUPPORT
ELEMENT (CSSE)
The Combat Servi ce Support El ement (CSSE)
provi des the combat servi ce support (CSS) to the
MAGTF that i s beyond the organi c capabi l i ty of the
subordi nate el ements. Dependi ng on the assi gned
mi ssi on, i t i s task or gani zed to pr ovi de al l of
the fol l owi ng functi ons: suppl y, mai ntenance,
engi neer, medi cal /dental , automated data processi ng,
materi al -handl i ng equi pment, personal servi ces, food
servi ces, transportati on, mi l i tary pol i ce, di sbursi ng,
and fi nanci al management.
SEPARATE TASK ORGANIZATIONS
Al though there are al ways four major el ements
wi thi n a MAGTF, separate task organi zati ons requi red
to perform combat support or combat servi ce support
functi ons may be formed. Naval Constructi on Force
Uni ts come under thi s type of organi zati on. Under
these ci r cumstance, the NCF i s OPCON (see
Gl ossary) to the MAGTF commander wi thi n the
Command El ement (fi g. 1-3).
TYPES OF MAGTFs
The type of MAGTF Seabees woul d be supporti ng
i s di ctated by the conti ngency. The three types of
MAGTFs are as fol l ows:
. Mari ne Expedi ti onary Uni t (MEU)
l Mari ne Expedi ti onary Force-Forward (MEF-F)
. Mari ne Expedi ti onary Force (MEF)
MARINE EXPEDITIONARY UNIT (MEU)
The Mari ne Expedi ti onary Uni t (MEU) i s a task
organi zati on that i s normal l y commanded by a col onel
and i s capabl e of performi ng combat operati ons of a
l i mi ted scope. The MEU i s the ai r-ground team
organi zati on that i s normal l y used for routi ne, forward
afl oat, and depl oyment requi rements. The MEU
provi des an i mmedi ate reacti on capabi l i ty to cri ses
and, when commi tted, i s normal l y supported from i ts
sea base. Normal l y, an Ai r Det from a Seabee
battal i on i s assi gned to an MEU (fi g. 1-4).
The MAGTFs el ements for a MEU are as fol l ows:
1-2
Figure 1-3.MAGTF command relationships.
Figure 1-4.MEU command relationships.
1. Ground Combat El ement (GCE): Normal l y, a from the force servi ce support group (FSSG) wi th
battal i on l andi ng team (BLT). Onl y under unusual
appropri ate attachments from di vi si on and wi ng assets.
ci nnunstances woul d the GCE consi st of two BLTs.
2. Avi ati on Combat El ement (ACE): Normal l y, a
MARINE EXPEDITIONARY
composi te hel i copter squadron. However, i n certai n
FORCE-FORWARD (MEF-F)
i nstances, the ACE may consi st of an attack squadron,
a hel i copter squadron, and el ements of an observati on
The Mar i ne Expedi ti onar y For ce-For war d
squadr on.
(MEF-F) (for mer l y cal l ed Mar i ne Expedi ti onar y
Bri gade [MEB]) i s a task organi zati on that i s normal l y
3. Combat Servi ce Support El ement (CSSE):
commanded by a bri gadi er general . An MEF-F i s
Wi thi n an MEU, normal l y cal l ed a servi ce support capabl e of conducti ng oper ati ons i n l ow- and
group (MSSG). The MSSG i s task-organi zed pri mari l y mi d-i n ten s i ty con fl i ct en v i r on men ts . Du r i n g
1-3
potenti al cri ses, the MEF-F maybe forward depl oyed
afl oat for an extended peri od to provi de i mmedi ate
response. Under these condi ti ons, MEF-F combat
operati ons may be supported from the sea base,
faci l i ti es ashore, or a combi nati on of the two. The
MEF-F i s normal l y organi zed to wcompl i sh a mi ssi on
of l i mi ted scope and an NMCB i s normal l y assi gned
to an MEF-F. The MAGTFs el ements of an MEF-F
are as fol l ows:
1. Ground Combat El ement (GCE): Normal l y, the
GCE i s a regi mental l andi ng team (RLT).
2. Avi ati on Combat El ement (ACE) Normal l y,
the ACE i s a Mari ne Ai rcraft Group (MAG) that can
provi de al l of the functi ons of Mari ne avi ati on. Unl i ke
the MEU, the Avi ati on Combat El ement of the MEF-F
i s organi zed and equi pped for earl y establ i shment
ashore. Shoul d the l andi ng area not contai n sui tabl e
ai rfi el ds, an expedi ti onary ai rfi el d wi l l be devel oped
usi ng assets organi c to the MEF-F.
3. Combat Servi ce Support El ement (CSSE):
The CSSE i s a bri gade servi ce support group (BSSG).
The BSSG i s task-organi zed pri mari l y from the force
ser vi ce suppor t gr oup (FSSG) wi th appr opr i ate
attachments from di vi si on and wi ng assets.
MARINE EXPEDITIONARY
FORCE (MEF)
The Mari ne Expedi ti onary Force (MEF), the
l argest of the MAGTF, has many vari ati ons i n i ts task
organi zati on structure. I t i s commanded by ei ther a
major general or a l i eutenant general , dependi ng on i ts
si ze and mi ssi on. The MEF can conduct a wi de range
of amphi bi ous and ashore operati ons. An MEF can be
tai l ored for any i ntensi ty of combat and to any
geographi c envi ronment. The CEC offi cer attached to
the Command El ement, engi neer staff, i s the l i ai son
between the MEF engi neer staff and NCF uni ts (fi g.
1-5).
The regi ments wi l l be OPCON to the MEFs
Command El ement and al l other NCF uni ts wi l l be
OPCON to the regi ments (fi g. 1-6).
The MAGTFs el ements of an MEF are as fol l ows:
1. Ground Combat El ement (GCE): The GCE i s
usual l y a Mari ne di vi si on wi th the appropri ate combat
uni ts. Certai n si tuati ons may requi re more than one
GCE i n the task organi zati on, concei vabl y up to two
rei nforced Mari ne di vi si ons.
2. Avi ati on Combat El ement (ACE): The ACE i s
usual l y a Mari ne Ai rcraft Wi ng task organi zed to
conduct al l types of tacti cal ai r operati ons. The el ement
i s desi gned for oper ati ons i n an expedi ti onar y
envi ronment. Certai n si tuati ons may requi re more than
one ACE i n the task organi zati on, concei vabl y up to two
Mari ne Ai r Wi ngs (MAWs).
3. Combat Servi ce Support El ement (CSSE): The
CSSE i s the force servi ce support group (FSSG) wi th
appropri ate attachments from di vi si on and wi ng assets.
REAR AREA SECURITY
Throughout the spectrum of confl i ct, rear support
ar eas have i ncr easi ngl y become major tar gets.
Modern weaponry has made rear areas extremel y
vul nerabl e. Rear area securi ty must counteract the
effects of modem weaponry to protect rear support
areas. Seabees are pri mari l y assi gned to the rear area
Figure 1-5.Marine Expeditionary Force Engineer Branch.
1-4
Figure 1-6.MEF major subordinate commands.
and therefore must be fami l i ar
organi zati on.
wi th the rear area
The mai n objecti ve of rear area securi ty (RAS) i s
to mi ni mi ze the effects of an enemy attack. Tacti cs
used by the RAS i ncl ude measures taken pri or, duri ng,
and after an enemy ai r bor ne attack, sabotage,
i nfi l tr ati on, guer r i l l a acti on, or i ni ti ati on of
psychol ogi cal or propaganda warfare. The MAGTF
rear area i s the area extended rearward from the rear
boundary of the Ground Combat El ement (GCE) to
the MAGTF rear boundary.
The objecti ve of RAS i s to provi de defense for al l
forces operati ng wi thi n the MAGTF rear area so those
functi ons associ ated wi th rear area operati ons, i n
support of combat operati ons, are not i nterrupted. Al l
uni ts i n the rear area must be prepared to defend
themsel ves to accompl i sh thi s objecti ve. A cl uster
concept i s used wi thi n the rear area so base faci l i ty
operati ons centers are establ i shed. An NMCB has a
formi dabl e array of weapons and has a si gni fi cant
capabi l i ty for defensi ve operati ons wi thi n the rear
area.
BASE FACILITY COMMANDER
The base faci l i ty commander i s responsi bl e for the
faci l i ty assi gned to hi m or her. Each uni t i s assi gned
to a base faci l i ty and reports to the base faci l i ty
commander by way of the COC (fi g. 1-7).
REAR AREA SECURITY
COORDINATOR (RASC)
The CSSE or the ACE commander i s usual l y
appoi nted by the MAGTF commander to coordi nate
rear mea securi ty (RAS) and normal l y functi ons as the
rear area securi ty coordi nator (RASC). The RASC
moni tors the day-today operati ons of the rear area
through the combat servi ce support operati ons center
(CSSOC) and the rear area operati ons center (RAOC).
The NCF commander coordi nates wi th the RASC to
ensur e that NCF assets and capabi l i ti es ar e
i ncorporated i nto the RAS effort.
PROVISIONAL SECURITY FORCES
An MEF RASC can or gani ze two types of
provi si onal securi ty forces: the previ si onal mobi l e
secur i ty pl atoons (PMSPs) and the pr ovi si onal
h el i copter -bor n e s ecu r i ty compan y (PHSC).
MAGTFs, smal l er than an MEF, wi l l have a tai l ored
provi si onal securi ty force. Based on the mi ssi on and
threat assessment, these uni ts can be used to support
l ocal defense efforts i n the support of the RAS. These
uni ts shoul d be i ncl uded i n your defense pl an.
Provisional Mobile Security
Platoons (PMSPs)
The force servi ce support group (FSSG), l ocated
wi thi n the rear area, can fi el d two provi si onal mobi l e
1-5
Figure 1-7.Security of base facilities.
securi ty pl atoons (PMSPs) to act as a qui ck reacti on
force i n support of RAS efforts. The PMSPs can be
tasked wi th the fol l owi ng mi ssi ons:
Rel i ef/rescue of attacked i nstal l ati ons/uni ts
Route patrol l i ng and convoy protecti on
Sur vei l l ance/r econnai ssance
Defense of possi bl e enemy drop/l andi ng zones
Fi ndi ng, fi xi ng, destr oyi ng enemy for ces
oper ati ng i n the r ear ar ea
Force Service Support Group
Military Police
The force servi ce support group mi l i tary pol i ce
are the MPs for the rear area and can be tasked wi th
the fol l owi ng mi ssi ons:
1. Provi de mi l i tary pol i ce to conduct battl efi el d
ci rcul ati on control for the MAGTF (materi al suppl y
routes securi ty).
2. Provi de mi l i tary pol i ce for l aw enforcement,
cri mi nal i nvesti gati on, U.S. pri soner confi nement, and
counteract terrori st acti vi ti es.
3. Establ i sh sur vei l l ance and conduct r oute
reconnai ssance i n the MAGTF rear area.
4. Provi de for the col l ecti on, processi ng, and
evacuati on of enemy pri soners of war (POW) and
ci vi l i an i nternees i n the MAGTF rear am.
COMBAT OPERATIONS CENTER
(COC)
The COC i s establ i shed to provi de the battal i on
commander centr al i zed command and contr ol
faci l i ti es for al l combat tacti cal and operati onal
operati ons conducted under hi s or her command. I t i s
the focal poi nt for the battal i on and the termi nati ng
poi nt for al l tacti cal and nontacti cal radi o nets.
The pri mary purpose of the COC i s to moni tor and
record the tacti cal and nontacti cal operati ons of the
battal i on conti nual l y. The speci fi c composi ti on and
functi ons of the COC wi l l vary wi th the desi res of the
i ndi vi dual commander . Nor mal COC functi ons
i ncl ude the fol l owi ng:
Recei vi ng and recordi ng operati onal reports
from subordi nate el ements and compani es
Mai ntai ni ng current pl ots of the fri endl y and
en emy s i tu ati on s an d di s pl ay i n g th i s
i nformati on wi thi n the COC
1-6
Prepari ng and submi tti ng operati onal reports to
hi gher headquarters
Provi di ng dedi cated communi cati on channel s
for tacti cal and operati onal reporti ng
Transmi tti ng orders and tacti cal deci si ons of the
battal i on commander to compani es subordi nate
el ements, and hi gher headquarter as requi red
Moni tori ng the progress of the battal i ons
tacti cal operati ons and expedi ti ousl y reporti ng
si gni fi cant events or i nci dents to the S-3 or the
commander
Advi si ng the fi re support coordi nati on center
(FSCC) and i nterested staff secti ons of events or
i nfomati on of i mmedi ate concern to them
Servi ng as the pri nci pal poi nt of contact for
l i ai son personnel from subordi nate, supporti ng,
or adjacent tacti cal el ements
The COC control s the battal i ons tacti cal nets
establ i shed by hi gher headquarters. A COC normal l y
has di rect sol e-user tel ephone ci rcui ts (hot l i nes) to
major subordi nate tacti cal uni ts and to the COC of
hi gher headquarters. Besi des voi ce radi o nets and
tel ephones, the battal i ons COC normal l y mai ntai ns
di rect tel etype l i nks wi th major subordi nate el ements
and wi th the COC of hi gher headquarters.
The oper ati ons offi cer (S-3) exer ci ses staff
supervi si on over the COC i n coordi nati on wi th the
trai ni ng (S-7) and i ntel l i gence offi cer (S-2).
LOCATION OF THE COMBAT
OPERATIONS CENTER (COC)
When establ i shi ng a COC, you shoul d gi ve speci al
consi derati on to l ocati on. The l ocati on of the COC
must be hard to detect by enemy forces, easy to defend,
and be establ i shed i n a central i zed l ocati on that i s
easi l y accessi bl e to battal i on personnel . Other factors
to consi der are central i zed communi cati ons and
vehi cl e traffi c.
Centralized Communications
The mai n COC i s centr al l y l ocated to each
companys command post to ensure posi ti ve control
by the battal i on commander.
Vehicle Traffic
As previ ousl y stated, the COC i s the pri nci pal
poi n t of con tact for l i ai s on per s on n el fr om
subordi nate, supporti ng, or adjacent tacti cal el ements.
Stri ct traffi c control measures are essenti al when these
supporti ng el ements vi si t the COC. These i ncl ude the
fol l owi ng:
At l east two di smount and two entry poi nts are
used to reduce traffi c concentrati ons.
Passenger di smount poi nts are conceal ed from
di rect observati on.
Vehi cl es are parked and camoufl aged i n one or
more parki ng areas wi thi n the l ocal securi ty
peri meter of the COC.
Constructi on of new roads i nto or by the COC i s
normal l y prohi bi ted. To l essen the chance of
detecti on by the enemy, you can use exi sti ng
roads.
Vehi cl es enteri ng or departi ng the area of the
COC are requi red to use exi ts that are conceal ed
by are cover or camoufl age.
COMMUNICATIONS
Super i or communi cati on i s cr i ti cal to COC
operati ons. The l ocati on of the COC i s one of the
factors that determi nes the communi cati on assets
requi red when establ i shi ng a communi cati on pl an.
Al so affected by the l ocati on of the COC i s the
l ocati on of the Antenna Farm di scussed l ater i n thi s
chapter .
DEFENSE AND SECURITY
To protect the COC from a di rect attack or enemy
i nfi l trati on, you must consi der vi tal defense and
securi ty measures, such as the fol l owi ng:
1. Securi ty force: A wel l -trai ned and organi zed
securi ty force assi gned to the COC.
2. Terrai n that enhances securi ty: An area of
i r r egul ar , wel l -for ested gr ound hamper s aer i al
observati on and, i f i t i ncl udes hi gh brush and l ow trees
as wel l , i t makes enemy ground observati on more
di ffi cul t. Ful l use i s made of natur al cover ,
conceal ment, and suppl ementar y camoufl age
measures. I ndi vi dual camoufl age di sci pl i ne i s ri gi dl y
enfor ced.
3. Locati on: Located near a uni t that can assi st i n
furni shi ng securi ty.
4. Entangl ements: Barbed and tacti cal wi re
entangl ements.
5. Ni ght noi se and l i ght di sci pl i ne: Ensure the
generator suppl yi ng power to the COC i s l ocated a good
di stance from the COC and i s sandbagged to muffl e the
1-7
sound of the generator. Al so, ensure the tent used for
the COC mai ntai ns l i ght di sci pl i ne.
ALTERNATE COC
I n case the COC i s destroyed, an al ternate COC i s
establ i shed. Al l the consi derati on for a COC am
dupl i cated i n the al ternate COC. Locati on of the
al ternate COC i s away from the mai n COC and
securi ty i s si mi l ar to the mai n COC. I n the event the
mai n COC i s destroyed, operati ons are expedi entl y
assumed i n the al ternate COC.
ORGANIZATION OF THE COMBAT
OPERATION CENTER
The i nternal organi zati on of the COC may vary
wi th each battal i on commander or conti ngency
operati ons. Wri tten Standard Operati ng Procedures
(SOPS) are establ i shed to avoi d any confusi on (fi g.
1-8). Personnel duti es, maps, and vari ous boards are
usual l y standard wi thi n any COC organi zati on.
PERSONNEL AND THEIR DUTIES
The oper ati ons offi cer (S-3) i s pr i mar i l y
responsi bl e for coordi nati ng, organi zi ng, operati ng,
Figure 1-8.Internal arrangement of COC.
1-8
and trai ni ng COC watch stander personnel . Personnel
ar e kept to a mi ni mum to si mpl i fy oper ati onal
effi ci ency. The fol l owi ng watch secti ons are manned
on a 24-hour basi s:
Intelligence Watch Officer (S-2)
Provi des compl ete supervi si on of handl i ng and
processi ng i nformati on rel ati ng to i ntel l i gence.
Gathers and di stri butes i nformati on gai ned from
i ntel l i gence (I NTEL) sources.
Prepares wri tten and oral bri efi ngs as requi red.
Mai ntai ns overl ays for the enemy si tuati on map
(I NTEL MAP).
Promptl y i nforms the operati ons offi cer (S-3) of
si gni fi cant or unusual i nci dents.
Supervi ses the mai ntenance of the i ntel l i gence
si tuati on bead, such as enemy and fri endl y
updates.
COC Watch Officer
Before assumi ng watch, reads message board, i s
bri efed on the present si tuati on from the current
COC watch offi cer, and makes l i ai son wi th other
staff secti ons.
Duri ng watch, keeps current on the tacti cal
si tuati on, makes routi ne deci si ons, and noti fi es
S-3 of i nci dents of an unusual nature.
Reads al l i ncomi ng and outgoi ng messages.
Takes acti on by del i veri ng messages to the
cogni zant secti on and ensures the appropri ate
acti on i s taken.
Has r el easi ng author i ty on al l outgoi ng
messages.
J ournal Clerk
. Mai ntai ns the uni t
establ i shed practi ce.
Communications Chief
j our nal accor di ng to
Supervi ses the acti ons of the communi cati on
personnel , such as radi o and tel ephone operators
(RTOs).
Ensur es i ncomi ng and outgoi ng messages
adhere to establ i shed routi ng procedure.
Ver i fi es cor r ect communi cati on secur i ty
measures are used by al l assi gned communi -
cators.
Determi nes communi cati on nets for al l outgoi ng
message traffi c.
Requests techni cal assi stance i n case of
equi pment or net fai l ure.
I nforms the COC watch offi cer the status of al l
nets.
Mai ntai ns a l og on radi o nets, noti ng openi ng
and cl osi ng ti mes, frequency changes, traffi c
del ays, or other perti nent i nci dents.
Communicators (Radio/Telephone
Operators [RTOs])
. Moni tors and operates radi os and swi tchboards
as assi gned.
l Fami l i ar wi th authenti cati on and encrypti on
methods.
. Message drafti ng.
Messengers/Security
. Performs al l duti es as assi gned.
. Ensures al l personnel enteri ng the COC appear
on the access list.
FSC Watch Officer
Advi ses the battal i on commander on al l fi re
support matters.
Ensures fi re support pl ans are carri ed out wi th
the fi re support means avai l abl e.
Approves or deni es al l cal l s for fi re mi ssi ons.
Di stri butes target i nformati on through FSC
channel s to seni or, subordi nate, and adjacent
uni ts.
Mai ntai ns cl ose communi cati on wi th the
battal i ons Fi re Di recti on Center (FDC) by
moni tori ng the mortar pl atoons cal l for fi re net
(COF).
Mai ntai ns a map of the area of operati ons (AO).
Veri fi es al l on cal l targets.
Requests fi re support from hi gher or adjacent
uni ts.
Plotters
. Ensures the proper mai ntenance of secti on
journal s, si tuati on charts, and maps
1-9
. Assi sts the secti on watch offi cer as requi red.
NBC/CBR Officer
The NBC/CBR offi cer pl ays a cri ti cal rol e i n the
earl y warni ng of a nucl ear, bi ol ogi cal , or chemi cal
attack. The NBC/CBR offi cer shoul d hol d the proper
Naval Enl i sted Cl assi fi cati on Code (NEC) to fi l l thi s
posi ti on profi ci entl y. The NBC/CBR offi cers duti es
Responsi bl e for or gani zi ng, tr ai ni ng, and
supervi si ng personnel assi gned to the battal i ons
decontami nati on teams.
Moni tors al l i ncomi ng messages rel ated to
weather i nformati on.
Responsi bl e for al l outgoi ng and i ncomi ng NBC
reports.
Establ i shes NBC fal l out zones to provi de earl y
warni ng of an NBC attack.
Advi ses the secti on watch offi cer on the setti ng
of mi ssi on-ori ented protecti ve posture l evel s
(MOPP l evel s).
CHARTS AND MAPS
The types of charts and maps requi red wi thi n the
COC vary accordi ng to the mi ssi on and the battal i on
commander. Al l charts and maps must be vi si bl e to
al l personnel i n the COC. Ensuri ng proper pl acement
enabl es al l personnel standi ng watch i n the COC to
moni tor current si tuati ons and to respond to any
i ncomi ng messages expedi entl y. The maps and charts
provi de detai l ed operati ons and I NTEL i nformati on.
Al so posted i n the COC i s a cl i pboar d for an
i ncomi ng/outgoi ng message readi ng fi l e.
The operati on map shows the area of operati on
and shoul d i ncl ude the fol l owi ng:
Fr i en dl y tr oop pos i ti on s i n cl u di n g th e
battal i ons fi re pl an
Current l ocati ons of command posts i n the area
of operati on
Locati on and status of patrol s
Landi ng zone l ocati ons
NBC corri dors/fal l outs
The operati on charts shoul d show the fol l owi ng:
Personnel strength
POWs or EPWs
Report status
Equi pment status
Cal l si gns and requenci es
Convoy status
Casual ti es wounded/KI A
Food/water/ammo status
The I NTEL map shoul d show the fol l owi ng:
Enemy troop di sposi ti on/strength wi thi n the AO
Enemy equi pment/weapons
Weather and astronomi cal data
The I NTEL charts shoul d show the fol l owi ng:
l Current I NTEL
. Chal l enge and passwords
. Current MOPP l evel
COMMUNICATION PLAN
On a modern battl efi el d, the abi l i ty of a battal i on
commander to pass i nformati on between hi s or her
troops and superi ors i s cri ti cal for the success of any
mi ssi on. An uncompl i cated, rel i abl e, fl exi bl e, and
r esponsi ve communi cati on pl an wi l l enabl e the
battal i on commander to car r y out hi s or her
operati onal pl ans effecti vel y. A wel l -thought-out
communi cati on pl an i s paramount to command and
control . Communi cati on i s the i nstruments by whi ch
a battal i on commander makes hi s or her orders known
and, as such, i s the voi ce of the command.
Communi cati on permi ts the battal i on commander to
exerci se command and control of assi gned forces,
supporti ng fi res, and combat servi ce support over
l arger areas. Any transmi ssi on speaks onl y for and
wi th the authori ty of the battal i on commander who
ori gi nates the transmi ssi on. A secondary purpose of
communi cati ons i s to si mpl i fy the tr ansfer of
i nfor mati on between i ndi vi dual s and gr oups of
i ndi vi dual s that i s necessary to the exerci se of
command and control .
Si nce the COC i s the nerve center for the battal i on
and the ter mi nati ng poi nt for al l tacti cal and
n on ta cti ca l r a d i o n ets , a wel l -th ou gh t-ou t
communi cati on pl an must be establ i shed. Li ke
everythi ng el se, the communi cati on pl an i s based upon
the mi ssi on. The communi cati on offi cer i s usual l y
tasked wi th the devel opment of the communi cati on
pl an. He or she shoul d i ncl ude i n the pl an
1-10
communi cati on requi rements for the COC, the setup of
a remote antenna farm, and a communi cati on network.
COMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS
Communi cati on requi rements wi thi n the COC
may v ar y accor di n g to th e mi s s i on bu t th e
communi cati on equi pment used to ful fi l l the
requi rements i s the same. Communi cati on equi pment
wi l l i ncl ude one radi o per operati ng net and fi el d
tel ephones (TA-312/PT) for S-3, S-2, and FSC. I n
general the requi rements are as fol l ows:
1. AN/PRC-77 or AN/PRC-119A: Radi os used to
communi cate wi th the base faci l i ty commander,
company command posts, convoys, forward observer,
and other uni ts l ocated wi thi n the base faci l i ty.
2. TA-312/PT (Fi el d Phone): A di rect phone l i ne
to the company command posts and the Fi re Di recti on
Center (FDC battal i on mortars).
3. AN/PRC-104: A hi gh-frequency (GF) radi o
usual l y used to communi cate wi th hi gher authori ty
outsi de the base faci l i ty.
4. SB-22/PT: A swi tchboard used to connect
numerous TA-312s.
5. AN/GRA-39: A remote uni t that enabl es the
operator to transmi t and recei ve voi ce communi cati on
through a radi o set from a di stance of up to 2 mi l es. I t
i s used to l i nk radi o communi cati on from a remote
antenna farm to the COC.
ANTENNA FARM
The antenna farm or communi cati on si te i s the
pr i ma r y l oca ti on of v a r i ou s a n ten n a s a n d
communi cati on equi pment needed to establ i sh
communi cati on i n the fi el d. Speci al consi derati on i s
gi ven for sel ecti ng a l ocati on for the antenna farm
because al l radi o communi cati on i n the COC depends
on i t.
An i mportant consi derati on i n sel ecti ng your si te
i s accessi bi l i ty. Ti me shoul d not be wasted by
establ i shi ng accessi bi l i ty. Whenever possi bl e, a si te
shoul d be l ocated near good reads. Thi s wi l l mi ni mi ze
any di ffi cul ty i n suppl yi ng the si te wi th water, fuel ,
oi l , food, and ammuni ti on.
Av oi d obs tr u cti on s l i k e s teel br i d ges ,
underpasses, power l i nes, or power uni ts that can
cause a weak or di storted si gnal comi ng from your
communi cati on equi pment. Better r esul ts ar e
obtai ned when the antennas are hi gh and cl ear of hi l l s,
cl i ffs, bui l di ngs, densel y wooded areas, and other
obstructi ons.
Other factors that must be consi dered are physi cal
securi ty and a l ocati on where terrai n wi l l not i nterfere
wi th transmi ssi ons. A rel ati vel y fl at hi l l top i s usual l y
the most desi rabl e si te l ocati on.
COMMUNICATION NETWORK
A communi cati on network i s a wri tten detai l ed
pl an accompani ed wi th a wi re and radi o pl an detai l i ng
wher e each type of communi cati on equi pment
transmi ts to (fi gs. 1-9 and 1-10).
To produce a communi cati on network, you must
know what frequency nets wi l l be requi red for the
mi s s i on . H i gh e r a u t h or i t y w i l l i s s u e a
Communi cati on El ectroni c Operati ng I nstructi on
(CEOI ) to assi st you wi th determi ni ng the frequency
nets requi red.
CEOI contai ns the techni cal gui dance requi red to
establ i sh and mai ntai n communi cati ons i n support of
operati ons. The CEOI provi des the detai l s requi red to
coordi nate and control the vari ous communi cati ons
means and functi ons wi thi n a uni t. Thi s document
nor mal l y contai ns cal l si gns, cal l wor ds, and
frequenci es to be used by desi gnated operati ng uni ts.
By provi di ng a standardi zed source of i nformati on,
the CEOI enhances both operati onal communi cati ons
capabi l i ti es and communi cati ons securi ty. I n case of
l oss or compr omi se, the standar di zed for mat
si mpl i fi es r api d i denti fi cati on, destr ucti on, and
r epl acement. The fol l owi ng i nfor mati on and
i nstructi ons are normal l y i ncl uded i n the CEOI :
General communi cati ons i nstructi ons
Cal l si gn assi gnments
Frequency assi gnments
Radi o net ci rcui t desi gnator
Wi re/cabl e trunk ci rcui t desi gnati ons
Wi re/cabl e taggi ng codes
Tel ephone di rectory names and numbers
Tel etype and data muti ng i ndi cators
I denti fi cati on and marki ng panel codes
Si gnal panel message i nstructi ons
Pyrotechni c and smoke codes
Ground-ai r si gnal s
Sound warni ng si gnal s
1-11
Figure 1-9.COC wire plan.
General cryptographi c i nstructi ons
. Effecti ve authenti cati on tabl es
Cryptographi c devi ces to be used Each CEOI i s cl assi fi ed accordi ng to content.
General cl assi fi cati on of the CEOI i s based on the
Current effecti ve edi ti ons of the cryptographi c
hi ghest cl assi fi ed i nstructi on i t contai ns. Some of the
key l i sts
frequency nets that may be l i sted i n the CEOI and may
Codes and ci phers
be requi red i n the COC areas fol l ows:
Passwords/chal l enge
1. Battal i on Comman d Net: Es tabl i s h es
communi cati on to the compani es for admi ni strati ve and
General authenti cati on i nstructi ons
l ogi sti cs i ssues.
1-12
Figure 1-10.COC radio plan.
2. Ba tta l i on Ta cti ca l Net: E s ta bl i s h es
4. Regi men tal Tacti cal Net: Es tabl i s h es
communi cati on to the compani es for tacti cal
communi cati on from the battal i ons COC to the
pur poses and var i ous r epor ts, such as SPOT,
regi ment when the battal i on i s OPCON to the regi ment.
SAL UTE, AMMUNI TI ON, CAUSAL I TY, an d
Used for tacti cal purposes and vari ous reports, such as
SPOT, SALUTE, AMMUNI TI ON, CAUSALTY, and
SI TREPS.
SI TREPs.
3. Regi mental Command Net: Establ i shes
5. Base Faci l i ty Command Net: Establ i shes
communi cati on from the battal i ons COC to the communi cati on from the battal i ons COC to the base
regi ment when the battal i on i s OPCON to the regi ment.
faci l i ty commander.
Used for admi ni strati ve and
Used for admi ni strati ve and l ogi sti cs i ssues.
l ogi sti cs i ssues.
1-13
6. Base Faci l i ty Tacti cal Net: Establ i shes
communi cati on from the battal i ons COC to the base
faci l i ty commander. Used for tacti cal purposes and
v a r i ou s r epor ts , s u ch a s SPOT, SAL U TE ,
AMMUMTI ON, CAUSALI TY, and SI TREPS.
7. Conduct of Fi re Net: Establ i shes communi ca-
ti on from the battal i ons COC to the battal i ons Fi re
Di recti on Center (FDC). Used by the compani es to cal l
i n fi re mi ssi ons and by the fi re support coordi nator to
cal l i n fi re support.
8. Rear Ar ea Oper ati n g Comman d Net:
E s ta bl i s h es commu n i ca ti on , u s u a l l y b y a
hi gh-frequency radi o (HF), from the battal i ons COC to
hi gher authori ty (i .e., RASC) l ocated outsi de the base
faci l i ty, such as RAOC.
9. Communi cati on Coordi nati on Net: Used sol el y
for communi cati on probl ems wi thi n the battal i on.
10. Al ert/Broadcast Net (HF): Used to pass al ert
warni ng traffi c or general traffi c about al l (or the
majori ty) of the uni ts wi thi n the area of operati ons.
OPERATION OF THE COMBAT
OPERATION CENTER
Once you know the uni ts wi thi n your area of
oper ati ons, who you ar e OPCON to, and have
establ i shed a communi cati on network, a Standard
Oper ati ng Pr ocedur e (SOP) i nstr ucti on for the
Combat Operati on Center shoul d be prepared. Al l key
personnel i nvol ved wi th the operati ons of the COC
shoul d be i nvol ved. Speci al consi derati on must be
gi ven to message handl i ng procedures, si tuati on
boards, uni t journal , fi re support coordi nator, and staff
bri efi ngs.
NOTE: The fol l owi ng par agr aphs contai n a
typi cal SOP for the Combat Operati on Center. The
one you may be tasked to desi gn maybe di fferent but
shoul d contai n the same basi c topi cs.
INCOMING MESSAGES
Al l i ncomi ng radi o traffi c wi l l be wri tten down on
authori zed message pads wi th an ori gi nal pl us two
copi es (fi g. 1-11).
A gui de for handl i ng messages i s as fol l ows:
FLASH: Not fi xed. Handl e as fast as humanl y
possi bl e; objecti ve i s l ess than 10 mi nutes.
IMMEDIATE: 30 mi nutes-1 hour.
PRIORITY: 1-3 hours.
. ROUTINE: 3-4 hours or start of busi ness on
the fol l owi ng day.
The message i s passed to the communi cati on chi ef
who checks the message for form at, spel l i ng, and
l egi bi l i ty . After ch eck i n g th e mes s age, th e
communi cati on chi ef passes the message wi th al l
copi es to the COC watch offi cer. The COC watch
offi cer assi gns the acti on as appropri ate and i ndi cates
the acti on secti on on the message, such as FSC and
S-2. The watch offi cer gi ves the ori gi nal to the journal
cl erk for l oggi ng, gi ves one copy to the acti on secti on,
and pl aces one copy on the readi ng board.
I ncomi ng messages recei ved by runner or fi el d
tel ephone are handl ed i n the same manner as i ncomi ng
radi o messages, except they are del i vered to the COC
watch offi cer wi th ou t r ou ti n g th r ou gh th e
communi cati on chi ef.
OUTGOING MESSAGES
The ori gi nati ng staff secti ons, such as FSC and
S-2, prepare an ori gi nal and two copi es of each
message prepared. Al l copi es are passed to the COC
watch offi cer. The COC watch offi cer revi ews the
message, si gns the rel easi ng bl ock, and passes one
copy to the journal cl erk for l oggi ng. The COC watch
offi cer then gi ves the ori gi nal pl us one copy to the
communi cati on chi ef. The communi cati on chi ef
passes one copy to the communi cator . After
transmi ssi on, the communi cator returns thi s copy wi th
the ti me of tr ansmi ssi on i ndi cated back to the
communi cati on chi ef. The communi cati on chi ef
returns a copy to the ori gi nator. The COC watch
offi cer gets the ori gi nal wi th the ti me of transmi ssi on
noted. The ori gi nal i s then pl aced on the outgoi ng
readi ng board after the journal cl erk l ogs the ti me of
transmi ssi on.
SITUATION BOARDS
Each cogni zant staff secti on, such as Ops and
I NTEL, i s r esponsi bl e for mai ntai ni ng cur r ent
si tuati on maps and other tacti cal i nformati on ai ds.
Cl ose moni tori ng of the devel opi ng tacti cal si tuati on
i s requi red to ensure that request for support or
i nformati on are provi ded expedi ti ousl y. The COC
watch offi cer shoul d ensure that any i nformati on
requi ri ng the updates of maps or charts i s forwarded
to the staff secti ons rapi dl y.
1-14
Figure 1-11.COC message handling routing.
UNIT J OURNAL FIRE SUPPORT COORDINATOR
The uni t journal provi des a summary of acti vi ti es Thi s acti vi ty i s i ncl uded i n the COC onl y when the
that i s used by commanders and oncomi ng duty
battal i ons are usi ng thei r mortars or provi di ng l i ai son
personnel to determi ne the current tacti cal si tuati on.
wi th hi gher commands for supporti ng arms. The FSC
I t covers a 24-hour peri od begi nni ng at 0001 l ocal
mai ntai ns maps, charts, and target l i sts for use duri ng
the defense.
ti me. The journal cl erk prepares the journal under the
di recti on of the COC watch offi cer. Al l i tems wi l l be
STAFF BRIEFINGS
entered i n a bri ef, accurate form. Peri odi c reports,
The operati ons offi cer (S-3) coordi nates bri efi ngs
such as SI TREPs, wi l l be referenced onl y. that present the current tacti cal si tuati on to the
1-15
battal i on commander . The or der for thi s staff
br i ef i s I ntel (S-2), communi cati on chi ef (S-3),
and FSC.
SUMMARY
To be pr ofi ci ent whi l e per for mi ng duti es
rel ated to COC operati ons, you must see the Bi g
Pi ctur e. Part of the Bi g Pi cture i s to know
about the MAGTF organi zati on. There are three
types of MAGTFs: Mar i ne Expedi ti onar y For ce
(MEF), Mar i ne Expedi ti onar y For ce-For war d
(MEF-F), and Mari ne Expedi ti onary Uni t (MEU).
Al l MAGTFs contai n four el ements: Command
El ement, Ground El ement, Avi ati on El ement, and
Combat Ser vi ce Suppor t El ement. Seabees can
be attached to any type of MAGTF as a separate
task organi zati on or to any el ement wi thi n the
MAGTF.
Seabees pl ay a vi tal rol e i n rear area securi ty.
They are expected to know the organi zati on i n the rear
area from the rear area operati ons commander
(RAOC) to the base faci l i ty commander (BF). The
rear area i s broken down i nto cl usters cal l ed base
faci l i ti es. Seabees must know how to command,
control , and defend the area assi gned to them wi thi n
the base faci l i ty.
I t i s i mportant that you understand your duti es as
wel l as al l of the other duti es i n the COC. Trai ni ng i s
the key. A wel l -thought-out communi cati on pl an and
standard operati ng procedures wi thi n the COC wi l l
hel p to el i mi nate the fog of war. As our motto states:
we do more then just bui l d; we can defend what we
bui l d.
1-16
CHAPTER 2
ORGANIZATION AND OPERATION OF THE COMPANY
COMMAND POST
I n the previ ous chapter, we l earned about the
i mportance of a profi ci ent Combat Operati ons Center
(COC). For a Combat Oper ati ons Center to be
effecti ve, i t must r ecei ve accur ate i nfor mati on
i mmedi atel y from the compani es assi gned to the uni t.
The l i ne compani es (Al fa, Bravo, Charl i e) man the
defensi ve l i nes that are the battal i ons porti on of the
defensi ve peri meter i n the rear area or the Forward
Edge of the Battl e Area (FEBA); therefore, they are
the eyes and ears of the COC. Company command
posts are establ i shed to hel p the compani es mai ntai n
command and control of thei r perspecti ve compani es.
Thi s chapter provi des detai l ed i nformati on about the
company command post and how the data i t provi des
to the COC i s vi tal to an effecti ve command and
control system.
COMPANY COMMAND POST
The company command post (CP) i s the central
poi nt from whi ch company operati ons are di rected.
The CP i s establ i shed to pr ovi de the company
commander centr al i zed command and contr ol
faci l i ti es for the pl atoons assi gned to the company.
The pl atoon commanders report al l acti vi ti es to the
company CP, r egar dl ess of thei r magni tudes,
concerni ng thei r perspecti ve pl atoons. The company
CP reports to the COC al l i nformati on concerni ng the
company.
The speci fi c composi ti on and functi ons of the
company command post var y wi th the mi ssi on
assi gned to the company. The normal functi ons of the
company CP are si mi l ar to the COC and i ncl ude the
fol l owi ng:
1. Recei vi ng and recordi ng operati onal reports
from the COC.
2. Mai ntai ni ng current maps and overl ays of
fri endl y and enemy si tuati ons wi thi n the companys
area of responsi bi l i ty. Thi s i nformati on i s di spl ayed
wi thi n the company command post.
3. Mai ntai ni ng current maps and overl ays of the
companys patrol routes and other routes that may come
i n contact wi th the companys area of responsi bi l i ty.
4. Prepari ng and submi tti ng operati onal reports to
the COC conceri ng the company.
5. Provi di ng dedi cated communi cati on channel s
for tacti cal and nontacti cal operati ons to the COC and
to the pl atoon commanders.
6. Transmi tti ng orders and tacti cal deci si ons of the
battal i ons COC to the pl atoons as requi red.
7. Moni tori ng the progress of the battal i ons
tacti cal operati ons and reporti ng i mmedi atel y to the
COC any si gni fi cant event or i nci dent concerni ng the
companys area of responsi bi l i ty.
LOCATION
The l ocati on consi derati ons of the company CP
are si mi l ar to the l ocati on consi derati ons of the COC.
The company CP must be hard to detect from enemy
forces and must be easy to defend and easi l y accessi bl e
to battal i on personnel . Other factors to consi der am
central i zati on, traffi c, communi cati ons, and defense
secur i ty.
Centralization
The company command post i s l ocated rear of the
forward pl atoons manni ng the defensi ve peri meter or
the FEBA and i s centered among those pl atoons to
enhance the executi on of command and control
operati ons.
Traffic
Al l of the traffi c enteri ng the company CP i s by
foot. Personnel approachi ng and returni ng to thei r
fi ghti ng posi ti ons from the company CP shoul d do so
by al ternate routes. When thi s rul e i s not fol l owed, a
beaten path l eadi ng to the company CP for the enemy
to fol l ow wi l l resul t.
Communication
Communi cati on i s vi tal to the company CP for the
effecti ve exer ci se of command and contr ol . The
company CP must have constant communi cati on wi th
2-1
the pl atoon commanders, the l i steni ng posts (LP), and
the observati on posts (OP). The pl atoon commanders
must have constant communi cati on wi th the troops on
the front l i nes. A break i n communi cati on can cause
massi ve confusi on and coul d resul t i n heavy casual ti es
and the l oss of l i ves. Communi cati ons i s covered i n
depth farther on i n thi s chapter.
Defense and Security
Defensi ve and securi ty measures for the company
CP ar e si mi l ar to that of the COC. The major
excepti on i s that the company CP i s not as forti fi ed as
the COC. For exampl e, barbed and tacti cal wi re
entangl ements are not used around the company CP
because of the constant fl ow of traffi c enteri ng the CP.
The company commander i s concerned pri nci pal l y
wi th th e defen s e of th e compan y s ar ea of
responsi bi l i ty.
ORGANIZATION OF THE COMPANY
COMMAND POST
The i nternal organi zati on of the company CP
vari es wi th each company or conti ngency operati on.
Wri tten Standard Operati ng Procedures (SOP) are
establ i shed to avoi d any confusi on. Personnel duti es,
maps, and vari ous boards are usual l y standard wi thi n
any company CP.
The company commander i s r esponsi bl e for
coordi nati ng, organi zi ng, operati ng, and trai ni ng
watch standi ng personnel for the company CP. The
number of personnel assi gned to the watch stati ons,
whi ch are manned on a 24-hour basi s, i s normal l y
mai ntai ned at the mi ni mum needed to meet
operati onal requi rements. The watch personnel and
thei r duti es are as fol l ows:
Watch Chief
1. Before assumi ng watch, the watch chi ef shoul d
read the message board, be bri efed on the current
si tuati on from the current watch chi ef, and then make
l i ai son wi th the COC.
2. Duri ng watch, keep current on the tacti cal
si tuati on of the battal i on, make routi ne deci si ons
concerni ng the company, and noti fy the company
commander of i nci dents of an unusual nature.
3. Read al l i ncomi ng and outgoi ng messages.
Take the appropri ate acti on on messages recei ved from
the COC. Ensure the COC i mmedi atel y recei ves
accurate i nformati on pertai ni ng to the companys area
of responsi bi l i ty.
4. Ensure i ncomi ng and outgoi ng messages fol l ow
establ i shed routi ng procedures.
5. Retai n rel easi ng authori ty on al l outgoi ng
messages.
6. Provi de compl ete supervi si on of operati ons i n
the company CP.
Watch Petty Officer
1. Handl e and process i nformati on rel ati ng to
i ntel l i gence.
2. Gather and di stri bute i nformati on gai ned from
i ntel l i gence sources.
3. Mai ntai n overl ays of the enemy si tuati on map
pertai ni ng to the companys area of responsi bi l i ty.
4. Promptl y i nform the watch chi ef of si gni fi cant
or unusual i nci dents.
5. Mai ntai n overl ays of the companys patrol s and
convoys.
6. Supervi se the acti on of the communi cati on
personnel .
7. Veri fy correct communi cati on securi ty measures
are bei ng used by al l assi gned communi cators.
Communicator
1. Moni tor radi o nets as assi gned.
2. Use al l necessar y measur es to mi ni mi ze
i ntercepti on or jammi ng of transmi ssi on.
Messengers/Security
1. Perform al l duti es as assi gned.
2. Ensure onl y authori zed personnel enter the
company CP.
CHARTS AND MAPS
The types of charts and maps requi red wi thi n the
company CP vary accordi ng to the mi ssi on and the
company commander. Al l boards and maps must be
vi si bl e to al l personnel i n the company CP. Thi s
arrangement enabl es al l personnel standi ng watch i n
the company CP to vi sual i ze current si tuati ons and to
hel p them to respond to any i ncomi ng messages
qui ckl y and accuratel y.
2-2
NOTE: Al so posted i n the company CP i s a
cl i pboar d that ser ves as an i ncomi ng/outgoi ng
message readi ng fi l e.
AREA MAP
Unl i ke the COC, there i s onl y one map to mai ntai n
i n the company CP. Thi s map di spl ays the bi g
pi cture of the compani es wi th emphasi s on each
companys fi re pl an and area of responsi bi l i ty. The
area map i ncl udes the fol l owi ng:
1. Fri endl y troop posi ti ons i n the companys area
of responsi bi l i ty
2. Detai l ed company fi re pl an that i ncl udes
cl aymore mi nes, tacti cal entangl ements, l i steni ng and
observati on posts, and earl y warni ng devi ces such as
tri p fl ares.
3. On cal l targets wi th the desi gnator of the target
establ i shed by the COC
4. Current l ocati on of the COC
5. Locati on and status of patrol s or convoys
6. Landi ng zone (LZ) l ocati ons
7. NBC corri dors/fal l outs
8. Overl ay of known enemy posi ti ons
CHARTS
The charts posted i n the CP gi ve personnel a qui ck
pi cture of the current si tuati on. I tems that need to be
di spl ayed on charts are not l i mi ted but shoul d at l east
Company strength
Report status of reports sent and i n process
Equi pment status
Cal l si gns and frequenci es
Convoy status
Food/water/ammo status of the company
Enemy equi pment/weapons
Weather and astronomi cal data
Chal l enge and passwor ds i ncl udi ng the
al ternati ve for the next 24 hours
Current MOPP l evel
COMMUNICATION PLAN
Li ke the COC, a company communi cati on pl an
needs to be prepared. Communi cati on i s essenti al for
the company commander to pass i nformati on between
the troops and the COC. An uncompl i cated, rel i abl e,
fl exi bl e, and responsi ve communi cati on pl an wi l l
enabl e the company commander to car r y out
operati onal pl ans generated from the COC effecti vel y.
The communi cati on offi cer i s responsi bl e for the
uni ts overal l communi cati on pl ans. The company
commanders work wi th the communi cati on offi cer for
the devel opment of a company communi cati on pl an
and communi cati on assets needed by the compani es.
The company commander shoul d i ncl ude i n the pl an
communi cati on requi rements for the company and a
communi cati on network.
COMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS
Commu n i cati on r equ i r emen ts wi th i n th e
company CP vary accordi ng to the mi ssi on, but the
communi cati on equi pment used to ful fi l l the
requi rements i s the sane. Communi cati on equi pment
i ncl udes the fol l owi ng:
1. AN/PRC-77 or AN/PRC-119A: Radi os used to
communi cate wi th the COC, the convoys, the forward
observers, the l i steni ng posts, and the patrol s.
2. TA-312/PT (Fi el d Phone): A di rect phone l i ne
to the COC, to the pl atoon commanders, and from the
pl atoon commanders to the troops manni ng the l i nes.
Usual l y a TA-312/PT i s r un fr om the pl atoon
commanders fi ghti ng posi ti on to the squad l eaders
fi ghti ng posi ti on or a crew-served weapon fi ghti ng
posi ti on on the l i nes.
3. SB-22/PT: The swi tchboard used to connect
numerous TA-312s.
COMMUNICATION NETWORK
A communi cati on network i s establ i shed si mi l ar
to the one cover ed i n chapter 1. The pl atoon
commander shoul d al so submi t a pl atoon wi re net and
radi o net pl an. The network shoul d have a graphi cal
di spl ay of al l communi cati on wi re l i nkups and radi o
nets moni tored by the company and pl atoons,
NOTE: Fi gures 2-1 and 2-2 are wi re and radi o
pl ans pertai ni ng to an i deal si tuati on. The one you wi l l
be tasked to desi gn shoul d be tai l ored accordi ng to the
assets avai l abl e, the l ocal terrai n, and the area of
responsi bi l i ty assi gned to the company.
2-3
Figure 2-1.Company CP wire plan.
Figure 2-2.Company CP radio plan.
2-4
The company commander shoul d recei ve a copy
of th e Commu n i cati on El ectr on i c Oper ati n g
I nstructi on (CEOI ) to fi nd out the radi o nets the
company i s requi red to moni tor. The contents of a
CEOI are di scussed i n chapter 1. There are normal l y
onl y two frequency nets that a company CP i s requi red
to moni tor:
1. Battal i on Command Net One: Establ i sh
communi cati on from the compani es to the COC for
admi ni strati ve and l ogi sti cs i ssues.
2. Battal i on Tacti cal Net Two: Establ i sh
communi cati on from the compani es to the COC for
tacti cal purposes. Used for vari ous reports, such as
SPOT, SALUTE, AMMUNI TI ON, CAUSALI TY, and
SI TREPS.
OPERATION OF THE COMPANY
COMMAND POST
A Stan dar d Oper ati n g Pr ocedu r e (SOP)
i nstructi on for the company CP shoul d be prepared.
Al l key personnel i nvol ved wi th the operati ons of the
company CP shoul d parti ci pate i n the preparati on of
the SOP. Speci al consi derati on must be gi ven to
message-handl i ng procedures and si tuati on boards.
The fol l owi ng paragraphs contai n a typi cal SOP
for the company CP. The one you may be tasked to
desi gn may be di fferent but shoul d contai n the same
basi c topi cs.
SOP FOR INCOMING MESSAGES
Al l i ncomi ng radi o traffi c shoul d be wri tten down
on authori zed message pads that al l ow the preparati on
of an ori gi nal pl us two copi es.
NOTE: A gui del i ne for handl i ng messages i s i n
chapter 1.
The communi cator passes an i ncomi ng message
to the watch petty offi cer who checks the message for
format, spel l i ng, and l egi bi l i ty. After checki ng the
message, the watch petty offi cer shoul d pass the
message wi th al l copi es to the watch chi ef who wi l l
deci de the appropri ate acti on to take. The ori gi nal
pl us one copy i s then fi l ed and one copy i s pl aced on
the readi ng board.
I ncomi ng messages recei ved by the runner or by
the fi el d tel ephone are handl ed i n the same manner as
i ncomi ng radi o messages. When the watch petty
offi cer i s preoccupi ed wi th other events, messages
shoul d be routed di rectl y to the watch chi ef.
SOP FOR OUTGOING MESSAGES
The watch petty offi cer prepares one ori gi nal and
two copi es of al l outgoi ng messages. Al l copi es are
passed to the watch chi ef. The watch chi ef revi ews
the message, si gns the rel easi ng bl ock, fi l es one copy,
and forwards two copi es to the communi cator. The
communi cator l ogs one copy and tr ansmi ts the
message. After tr ansmi ssi on, the communi cator
returns the ori gi nal copy, wi th the ti me of transmi ssi on
shown, back to the watch petty offi cer. The watch
chi ef r ecei ves the or i gi nal wi th the ti me of
transmi ssi on noted. The ori gi nal i s pl aced on the
outgoi ng readi ng board.
NOTE: When the watch petty offi cer i s
pr eoccupi ed, the watch chi ef pr epar es outgoi ng
messages.
REPORTING PROCEDURES
Reporti ng procedures must be establ i shed for the
company CP to be effecti ve. The use of standardi zed
r epor ts speeds i nfor mati on fl ow and si mpl i fi es
support requests. Proper communi cati on procedures,
i ncl udi ng encrypti on of sensi ti ve i nformati on, must be
fol l owed i n submi tti ng al l reports. Every person i n the
company must know the proper reporti ng procedures.
I nformati on from the l i nes must get rel ayed back to
the company CP i n an accurate and ti mel y fashi on.
Formats for reports may vary from uni t to uni t. The
two most commons are the SALUTE and SPOT
reports.
The pl atoon commander recei ves i nformati on
from the l i nes by l andl i ne or radi o. The pri mary
means of communi cati on between the pl atoon
commander and squad l eaders are wi re. Messengers,
vi sual si gnal s, personal contact, or whi stl es may be
used when they are more appropri ate than phones and
radi os.
As previ ousl y menti oned, the l ocati on of fi el d
phones on the l i nes i s di ctated by the assets avai l abl e,
the terrai n, and the si ze of the area of responsi bi l i ty
assi gned to the company. The pl atoon commander
must be abl e to r el ay i nfor mati on qui ckl y and
accuratel y. The pl atoon commander must al so have
compl ete command and control of the squads and
crew-served weapons assi gned to the pl atoon.
The i deal si tuati on i s for the pl atoon commander
to have a TA-312/PT (fi el d phone) at each squad
l eaders fi ghti ng posi ti on or crew-served weapon
posi ti on. The fi el d phones wi l l ti e i nto a swi tchboard
2-5
(SB-22/PT) l ocated i n the pl atoon commander s Acti vi ty, Locati on, Uni t, Ti me, Equi pment). The
fi ghti ng posi ti on. The pl atoon commander wi l l be ti ed company CP rel ays the i nformati on to the COC wi th
i nto the company CP. Fi gure 2-3 shows an i deal radi o a SALUTE report.
networ k.
A SPOT report i s a hasti l y modi fi ed SALUTE
The pl atoon commander rel ays the i nformati on to report contai ni ng l ess detai l . An exampl e of the
the company CP, usi ng the acronym SALUTE (Si ze, di fference between the two reports i s when the
Figure 2-3.Various platoon and radio net illustration.
2-6
company i s engaged i n a fi re fi ght on the l i nes. The
pl atoon commander must concentrate on the fi re fi ght
and has l i ttl e ti me to send a formal SALUTE report to
the company CP. Several SPOT reports are used to
mai ntai n communi cati on wi th the company CP. The
company CP i s al so busy concentrati ng on the fi re
fi ght and wi l l rel ay several SPOT reports to the COC.
When the fi re fi ght i s over, the company CP wi l l send
the COC a formal SALUTE report based from the
SPOT reports.
A SALUTE report i s used when the observed
acti vi ti es of the enemy do not pose a threat to the
company. Thi s gi ves the pl atoon commander and the
company CP ti me to eval uate the si tuati on and to send
the COC a formal SALUTE report.
The i mportant thi ng i s to keep the COC i nformed
of ever ythi ng and mai ntai n the top pr i or i ty of
defendi ng the companys area of responsi bi l i ty. What
may not seem like vital information to you may be
vital information to someone else. When i n doubt
send a SPOT or SALUTE report.
AREA MAPS AND CHARTS
The watch petty offi cer i s pri mari l y responsi bl e
for mai ntai ni ng the si tuati on map and other tacti cal
i nformati on ai ds; however, thi s task i s usual l y shared
wi th the watch chi ef. The watch chi ef ensures that any
i nformati on requi ri ng the updates of maps or charts i s
qui ckl y carri ed out.
SUMMARY
As you can see from thi s chapter, the company CP
pl ays a vi tal rol e i n rel ati on to the COC and the overal l
defense pl ans of the battal i on. The organi zati on of the
company CP i s si mi l ar to the COC but on a smal l er
scal e. The pri mary di fference i s the communi cati on
from the defensi ve l i nes or the FEBA to the company
CP. Emphasi s i s pl aced on defendi ng the companys
ar ea of r esponsi bi l i ty whi l e keepi ng the COC
i nformed. A SPOT report i s a rapi d way to i nform the
COC of vi tal i nformati on and shoul d be fol l owed up
wi th a SALUTE report. The COC depends on the
company CP for accurate and conci se i nformati on.
Str ong coor di nati on between the COC and the
company CP can ensure a vi ctori ous outcome for any
combat mi ssi on assi gned to a Seabee organi zati on.
2-7
CHAPTER 3
SETUP AND CONTROL OF MEDICAL EVACUATION
(MEDEVAC)
Medi cal evacuati on
responsi bi l i ti es shared by
and casual ty car e ar e
everyone i nvol ved wi th
command and contr ol acti vi ti es. Al l per sonnel
assi gned to the uni t must be aware of casual ty faci l i ti es
and medi cal evacuati on procedures (MEDEVAC). A
wel l -devel oped MEDEVAC pl an wi l l not onl y save
l i ves but wi l l al so ensure the uni t i s ready for present
and future mi ssi ons. The l oss of any Seabee because
of a poor MEDEVAC pl an i s i nexcusabl e and can
resul t i n a di sastrous l ack of fi repower when i t i s most
needed. Thi s chapter covers i n depth the setti ng up of
a l andi ng zone, the l andi ng zone bri ef, the medi cal
evacuati on request, and the medi cal evacuati on
pr ocedur es.
Figure 3-1.Helicopter landing zone (LZ).
LANDING ZONE/SITE/POINTS
A hel i copter l andi ng zone (LZ) i s a speci fi ed
gr ound for l andi ng hel i copter s to embar k or
di sembar k tr oops or car go. A l andi ng zone i s
desi gnated by a code name. I t may i ncl ude one or
more l andi ng si tes.
Dependi ng upon the terrai n and the si ze of the
Seabee uni t, you can di vi de the LZ i nto several
landing sites. A l andi ng si te i s a speci fi c l ocati on
wi thi n a l andi ng zone i n whi ch a si ngl e fl i ght of
hel i copters may l and to embark or di sembark troops
or cargo. Landi ng si tes are desi gnated by col or, such
as l andi ng si te red. A l andi ng si te contai ns one or
more l andi ng poi nts (fi g. 3-1).
A hel i copter l andi ng poi nt i s an area wi thi n a
l andi ng si te where an i ndi vi dual hel i copter can l and.
Landi ng poi nts are desi gnated by two-di gi t numbers,
such as l andi ng poi nt 12. For pathfi nder purposes, the
l andi ng poi nts are i denti fi ed by the use of smoke or ai r
panel s. For ni ght operati ons, you can mark the
l andi ng poi nts wi th some type of l ow-i ntensi ty l i ght.
A general rul e i s to posi ti on l andi ng poi nts ten ti mes
as far from an obstacl e as the obstacl e i s hi gh (10:1
r ati o).
NOTE: I n most cases, a Seabee uni t wi l l be
requi red to construct a l andi ng zone wi th one l andi ng
si te and one l andi ng poi nt for resuppl i es, troop
movement, or medi cal evacuati ons.
PREPARATION OF THE LANDING ZONE
When pl anni ng the preparati on of an LZ, you
shoul d take several factors i nto consi derati on. Fi rst,
you shoul d know what type of hel i copters wi l l be
usi ng the l andi ng zone. The Combat Operati on Center
(COC) can provi de thi s type of i nformati on. Second,
you must consi der the Seabee uni ts posi ti on i n
rel ati on to the enemy. Securi ty troops must establ i sh
a 360-degree peri meter around the l andi ng zone to
defend the LZ. A thi rd factor i s the ti me i t wi l l take
to prepare the l andi ng zone. And a fourth factor
consi dered i s the equi pment needed to prepare the LZ.
Approaches and Exits
The ground approaches to the LZ and exi ts from
the LZ must be free of major obstacl es that mi ght
obstruct l andi ng or takeoffs, such as tal l trees,
tel ephone pol es, or power l i nes. Approaches and exi ts
shoul d al so be cl ear of obstructi ons that are 10 meters
or hi gher, extendi ng at l east 50 meters i n the di recti on
of approach and exi t paths. The rul e of thumb for
determi ni ng the di stance requi red between the l andi ng
poi nt and a hi gh obstructi on i s a 10:1 rati o. Thi s
3-1
means that the di stance a l andi ng poi nt i s l ocated from
a tree i s ten ti mes the hei ght of the tree.
Example: A hel i copter l andi ng or taki ng off near
a 30-foot tree needs at l east 300 feet of hori zontal
cl earance (fi g. 3-2).
Ground Obstacles
Obstacl es on the ground, such as stumps or rocks,
shoul d not exceed 1 foot i n hei ght on l evel ground and
shoul d be l ess on sl opi ng ground.
Gradient (Slopes)
Gr ound sl ope has a consi der abl e effect on
sel ecti ng a l andi ng si te or l andi ng poi nt wi thi n the LZ.
A hel i copter cannot l and safel y i n l ocati ons where the
ground sl opes more than 14 degrees. When pi l ots l and
on a sl ope, they prefer to l and uphi l l because of the
tai l down atti tude of the hel i copter.
Surface Conditions
Mud, excessi ve dust, and l oose debr i s ar e
consi der ed undesi r abl e sur face condi ti ons for
hel i copters. Mud causes a hel i copter to become
bogged down. Excessi ve dust reduces vi si bi l i ty and
compromi ses the l ocati on of the si te. Loose debri s i s
dangerous because they are sucked up i nto the rotor
bl ades or turbi ne i ntakes, causi ng seri ous damage.
Shal l ow water, l ess than 18 i nches deep and wi th a
fi rm bottom, can be used as a l andi ng si te.
Winds
When the wi nd at ground l evel exceeds 10 knots,
the hel i copter must l and i nto the wi nd.
LANDING SITE DIMENSIONS
Landi ng si te di mensi ons vary, dependi ng on the
number of l andi ng poi nts requi red. For each l andi ng
poi nt, a fusel age safe ci rcl e i s cl eared of al l obstacl es,
such as stumps, rocks, or bushes. Cl ear a rotor safe
ci rcl e of al l obstacl es that coul d obstruct the rotor
bl ades (fi g. 3-3).
When there i s to be more than one l andi ng poi nt
wi thi n the l andi ng si te, separate the l andi ng poi nts so
the hel i copters can si mul taneousl y l and safel y i n the
l andi ng si te. Use fi gure 3-4 as a gui de i n sel ecti ng the
appropri ate si ze l andi ng zone.
MARKING THE LANDING ZONE
Once you have establ i shed the LZ, the l andi ng
si tes, and the l andi ng poi nts, you need to di rect the
hel i copter to the l ocati on of the LZ. The proper
marki ng of the LZ wi l l ai d the pi l ot i n l ocati ng i t.
Figure 3-2.Horizontal clearance.
Figure 3-3.Landing point dimensions.
3-2
Figure 3-4.Landing zone diameter.
Recommendati ons for marki ng an LZ and for gui di ng
a hel i copter to an LZ are as fol l ows:
1. Daylight landing: The l andi ng zone i s
equi pped wi th a means of showi ng wi nd di recti on and
vel oci ty. Thi s i s usual l y accompl i shed by the use of
smoke or by verbal radi o message. Expedi ent methods
for determi ni ng wi nd di recti on and vel oci ty are as
fol l ows:
a. Grass drop method. Extend your arm
strai ght out and drop the grass from your hand. Poi nt
the extended arm at the dropped grass on the ground.
The angl e between the arm and the body di vi ded by four
i s the wi nd vel oci ty i n knots.
b. Angle of smoke method. Observe the
angl e at whi ch smoke bl ows. The wi nd speed i s as
fol l ows:
I f smoke goes strai ght up, no wi nd.
I f smoke bl ows at a 30-degree angl e, wi nd
i s 3-5 knots.
I f smoke bl ows at a 60-degree angl e,
wi nd i s 5-7 knots.
I f smoke bl ows al ong the ground, wi nd
exceeds 8 knots.
Use smoke and l andi ng zone panel s to mark a
l andi ng zone by day. Both shoul d be the same col or
as the desi gnati on of the l andi ng zone. Thi s wi l l ai d
the pi l ot i n l ocati ng the l andi ng zone, Mark obstacl es
that cannot be removed wi thi n the l andi ng zone wi th
si ngl e red panel s staked to prevent uprooti ng by rotor
wash.
SECURITY CAUTION: I f smoke i s used to mark the
l andi ng zone, use only as needed and do not tell the
pilot the color of smoke; ask the pi l ot to acknowl edge
the col or after the smoke grenade i s set off.
2. Night landing: The organi zati on and use of an
LZ at ni ght or duri ng peri ods of l ow vi si bi l i ty i s more
compl ex compared to dayti me operati ons. Speci al
l i ghti ng equi pment or fi el d expedi ents as requi red.
a. You must i ndi cate outl i nes of l andi ng zones
by l ow-i ntensi ty markers.
b. You must show obstacl es near the l andi ng
zone by l ow-i ntensi ty mar k er s or voi ce r adi o
i nstructi ons.
Another method of gui di ng the ai rcraft to the zone
i s vector i nstr ucti ons. Thi s i s si mpl y r el ayi ng
i nstructi ons to the pi l ot by radi o. For exampl e, the
radi o operator spots the hel i copter. Usi ng a compass,
the radi o operator shoots an azi muth of 135 degrees
from the LZ to the hel i copter and qui ckl y computes a
back azi muth of 315 degrees. The radi o operator then
transmi ts the fol l owi ng message:
HOME WI SH, THI S I S FLI GHT BEE . . .
VECTOR THREE ONE FI VE TO LANDI NG ZONE
HAWK . . . OVER.
The pi l ot then acknowl edges the message and takes up
the correct headi ng of 315 degrees. The term vector i s
al ways used i n a si tuati on l i ke thi s to prevent
mi sunderstandi ng. As the hel i copter approaches, mi nor
correcti ons wi l l probabl y be necessary. These are gi ven
as correcti ons to the ori gi nal headi ng b y the fol l owi ng:
HOME WI SH, THI S I S FLI GHT BEE. . . COME
RI GHT FI VE DEGREES OF PRESENT COURSE. . .
OVER.
When the tacti cal si tuati on does not al l ow the use
of a compass, you can vector the hel i copter to an LZ
by usi ng the cl ock system:
HOME WI SH, THI S I S FLI GHT BEE . . . MY
POSI TI ON I S AT YOUR NI NE OCLOCK . . .
OVER.
3-3
The ai rcraft woul d then execute a 90-degree turn
to the l eft.
LANDING SIGNALMAN
ENLISTED (LSE) SIGNALS
Once the pi l ot has l ocated the LZ, you can now
hel p the pi l ot l and the hel i copter. These si gnal s are
vi sual arm-and-hand si gnal s used by personnel to
tal k to the pi l ot of the l andi ng hel i copter. The
confi dence of the pi l ot i n the LSEs si gnal s depends
on the preci se manner i n whi ch the LSE gi ves the
si gnal . Movements are sharp and preci se. LSEs
si gnal s are executed exactl y as prescri bed. The LSE
must al ways remai n al ert for si gnal s from the pi l ot.
Duri ng ni ght operati ons, LSEs must use i l l umi nated
wands. Dur i ng a l andi ng appr oach, the LSEs
functi ons areas fol l ows:
1. I nform the pi l ot of the approachi ng hel i copter
that you are the LSE. You do thi s by means of the
Prepare for Gui dance si gnal .
2. I ndi cate the l andi ng poi nt to the pi l ot by
posi ti oni ng yoursel f 25 meters i n front of and 10 meters
to the ri ght of the l andi ng poi nt as the pi l ot l ooks at i t.
3. Ai d the pi l ot i n l andi ng safel y on the l andi ng
poi nt. The pi l ot i s responsi bl e for the approach and
l andi ng of the hel i copter. However, the pi l ot rel i es
heavi l y on the LSE to provi de warni ng of condi ti ons of
whi ch he or she i s not aware of and to di rect the
hel i copter to a safe l andi ng poi nt.
4. The onl y si gnal that the LSE must gi ve to the
pi l ot on the deck i s the Wave-Off si gnal . Al l other
si gnal s are advi sory si gnal s to the pi l ot. The deci si on
to acceptor reject the si gnal i s sol el y the responsi bi l i ty
of the pi l ot. Responsi bi l i ty for the safety of the ai rcraft
can never be rel i nqui shed to the LSE. The Wave-Off
si gnal i s gi ven when i t i s not safe for the hel i copter to
l and.
5. I ndi cate to the pi l ot when i t i s safe to take off.
NOTE: Fi gures 3-5 through 3-14 are I ni ti al
Termi nal Gui dance LSE si gnal s that are standard
throughout the Mari ne Corps. Any mi sunderstandi ngs
that may ari se about si gnal s are cl ari fi ed by cl ose
coordi nati on wi th the supporti ng hel i copter uni t. The
si gnal s are used for dayti me operati ons. Si gnal s gi ven
at ni ght are executed i n the same manner except that
an i l l umi nated amber di rectors wand (Chem Li te) i s
hel d i n each hand.
Figure 3-5.Prepare for guidance.
Figure 3-6.Forward.
Figure 3-7.Backward.
Figure 3-8.Hover.
3-4
Figure 3-9.Move right/left.
Figure 3-10.Downward.
Figure 3-11.Land.
Figure 3-12.Upward.
Figure 3-13.Takeoff.
Figure 3-14.Wave-off.
LANDING ZONE BRIEF
When a hel i copter has to l and for tr oop
pi ckup/drop, resuppl y, MEDEVAC, or for any other
reason, the pi l ot must have certai n i nformati on to
ensure a safe l andi ng. Thi s i nformati on i s provi ded i n
a l andi ng zone bri ef (fi g. 3-15).
3-5
Figure 3-15.Landing zone brief.
Each l i ne of the l andi ng zone bri ef i s expl ai ned
Line 3:
bel ow.
Line 1:
Line 2:
Line 4:
The mi ssi on number wi l l be assi gned to Line 5:
the pi l ot by Di rect Ai r Support Center
(DASC) p er s on n el . U n d er n or ma l
ci r cumstance thi s l i ne i s not used by
Line 6:
Seabee uni ts.
Gi ve at l east a si x-di gi t gri d to i denti fy
Line 7:
the l ocati on of the LZ.
Your cal l si gn.
Sel f-expl anatory.
Li st the methods of marki ng the LZ. For
exampl e, smok e, ai r panel s, si gnal
mi rrors, l i ghts, and so forth.
State the di recti on from whi ch the wi nd i s
comi ng and the wi nd speed i f known.
State the el evati on of the LZ (ai r i s thi nner
at hi gher al ti tudes) and the si ze of the LZ.
3-6
Line 8:
Line 9:
Line 10:
Line 11:
Line 12:
Line 13:
Line 14:
Line 15:
Line 16:
An obstacl e i s anythi ng hi gher or deeper
than 1 foot on the LZ or anythi ng near the
LZ that may create a hazard to the ai rcraft.
Expl ai n where the obstacl es are i n rel ati on
to the LZ.
State where fri endl y troops are i n rel ati on to
the LZ.
State the l ocati on of the enemy i n rel ati on to
the LZ.
Sel f-expl anatory.
Sel f-expl anatory.
State the di r ecti on and di stance the
hel i copter can fi re wi thout endangeri ng
fri endl y troops.
I f possi bl e, the approach headi ng shoul d be
i nto the wi nd. The reti rement or departure
shoul d be cl ear of enemy posi ti ons.
Th e di ffer en t h el i copter s u s ed for
MEDEVAC operati ons vary i n the number
of p er s on n el a n d equ i p men t th ey
can transport. I ncreased el evati on and
temperature decrease the wei ght capaci ty of
a hel i copter. A hel i copter pi l ot must know
exactl y the number of personnel and what
type of equi pment i s to be transported.
Anythi ng not previ ousl y menti oned that
coul d hel p the pi l ot i n anyway.
MEDICAL EVACUATION REQUEST
(MEDEVAC)
A MEDEVAC request contai ns al l the i nformati on
that Di rect Ai r Support Center (DASC) personnel
need to di spatch a hel i copter to your posi ti on. I n a
combat si tuati on, the Combat Operati on Center
(COC) routes the request from the battal i on ai d stati on
to hi gher headquarters. Hi gher headquarters wi l l
route the request to DASC personnel . I n extreme
si tuati ons where communi cati on to the COC or the
battal i on ai d stati on i s i nter r upted, pl atoon
commanders or company commandes shoul d have
the k nowl edge and capabi l i ti es to r equest a
MEDEVAC. The oper ati on pl an (OPLAN) wi l l
expl ai n the routi ng of a MEDEVAC request. A
MEDEVAC request does not actual l y bri ng the
hel i copter to the LZ. The request si mpl y i denti fi es the
requesti ng uni t, l ocati on of the LZ, and descri bes the
casual ty. The DASC wi l l mak e the necessar y
arrangements/deci si ons concerni ng the MEDEVAC
request. The format i n fi gure 3-17 contai ns al l the
i nformati on requi red i n a MEDEVAC request. The
format may change sl i ghtl y at di ffenmt organi zati ons.
MEDEVAC PROCEDURES
The i mportance of a wel l -thought-out MEDEVAC
pl an cannot be emphasi zed enough. The l i ves of
everyone i n the uni t depend on i t. Al l personnel
assi gned to the uni t must know the MEDEVAC
pr ocedu r es . The el ements r equi r i ng speci al
consi derati on are l i tter bearers, ambul ance, battal i on
ai d stati on, and LZ securi ty.
LITTER BEARERS
Li tter bearers shoul d be personnel , such as
messcook s, per sonnel men, and yeomen, fr om
Headquar ter s Company. The l i tter bear er s ar e
assi gned as stretcher teams wi th the COC bei ng the
pri me coordi nator for thei r uti l i zati on. The COC
wi l l i nfor m the battal i on ai d stati on for thei r
assi stance. Many vari ati ons occur however, and i t
must be emphasi zed that thi s source of l i tter bearers
i s not taken for granted. Pl atoon commanders and
the company chi ef must be assured of an adequate
number of l i tter teams. Ei ght men per company are
consi dered adequate unl ess mass casual ti es are
anti ci pated. Other sources of l i tter bearers are as
fol l ows:
1. Member s of the pl atoon. Thi s sour ce i s
menti oned onl y to be di scouraged, al though i t wi l l be
wel l recogni zed that i n an emergency thi s may be the
onl y source avai l abl e. Uti l i zati on of pl atoon personnel
manni ng the defensi ve l i nes or FEBA may resul t i n a
di sastrous l ack of fi re power when i t i s most needed for
defense.
2. Members of the reserve pl atoon. Here agai n i t
i s recogni zed that i n an emergency, thi s source must be
used. However, to rel y on thi s source i s not a good
practi ce because the reserve pl atoon i s cri ti cal l y needed
duri ng a heavy attack; therefore, i f the pl atoon i s used
for casual ty evacuati on, the company commander may
be caught shorthanded.
When a casual ty occurs, the wounded person, i f
possi bl e, shoul d go to a rel ati vel y protected l ocati on
away from the defensi ve l i nes or FEBA. The word
i s then qui etl y passed to the CP for a corpsman or
l i tter bearer. The CP wi l l then i nform the COC for
acti on. Pas s i n g th e wor d back qu i etl y an d
expedi ti ousl y i s i mportant. Loud shouti ng for a
3-7
cor psman by al l the tr oops i n the vi ci ni ty can Li tter bearers are vi tal for the survi val of a
have a demor al i zi ng effect on other tr oops. casual ty, i n the mai ntenance of good mor al e,
I nci dents have occur r ed when i nexper i enced and most of al l to prevent l oss of fi repower for
tr oop s h a v e p a n i ck ed beca u s e of f r en zi ed the defendi ng pl atoons. For these reasons, i t i s
shouti ng of the whol e squad for a corpsman to vi tal that provi si ons for l i tter bearers be i ncl uded
take care of a si ngl e casual ty. i n the MEDEVAC pl an.
Figure 3-16.Sample of landing zone brief.
3-8
Figure 3-17.MEDEVAC request.
AMBULANCE
An ambul ance i s nor mal l y stati oned at the
battal i on ai d stati on (BAS) and functi ons as far
forward as the terrai n and enemy acti vi ty permi ts. The
ambul ance i s pri mari l y used to prevent the prol onged
carryi ng of l i tters. When the ambul ance i s cal l ed
forward, expl i ci t i nstructi ons are gi ven as to routes
taken and the exact l ocati on to whi ch i t i s to go.
Ambul ances frequentl y draw enemy mortar and
arti l l ery fi re; therefore, they shoul d not be brought up
to an area under di rect observati on of the enemy.
BATTALION AID STATION
The battal i on ai d stati on i s the central l ocati on that
al l casual ti es ar e taken to befor e any type of
evacuati on. Medi cal staff personnel are the onl y
personnel qual i fi ed i n determi ni ng whether a casual ty
must be evacuated (commonl y referred to by the term
MEDEVACed). Other functi ons of the battal i on ai d
stati on are to gi ve further fi rst ai d, check for conti nued
hemorrhage, rebandage where needed, and appl y
spl i nts i f needed. Seri ousl y wounded casual ti es are
gi ven supporti ve therapy for shock i n the form of
pl asma and serum al bumen i n preparati on of a
MEDEVAC. Once the medi cal staff has determi ned
the pri ori ty of the casual ti es requi ri ng a MEDEVAC
and those not expected to survi ve the fl i ght, the COC
i s contacted and sends a MEDEVAC request to hi gher
authori ty. I t i s recommended that the chapl i n i s
avai l abl e for those not expected to survi ve.
SECURITY
Once the MEDEVAC request has been sent to
hi gher authori ty, the COC wi l l qui ckl y acti vate the
securi ty team. The securi ty team (React Force) i s
r esponsi bl e for secur i ng the LZ, establ i shi ng
communi cati on, l andi ng, and assi sti ng the l oadi ng of
3-9
the hel i copter. Al so control l ed by the securi ty team i s
the stagi ng area for those requi ri ng MEDVAC. A
member of the securi ty team i s establ i shed as a Pi t
Boss that wi l l control the l i tter bearers and al l
movement of the wounded to the LZ.
Securing the LZ
Weapons and personnel requi red to secure an LZ
are di ctated by the si ze and terrai n of the LZ. A
360-degree peri meter must be establ i shed around the
LZ. Al l l i kel y avenues of approach and sectors of fi re
must be covered. Hel i copter pi l ots wi l l not l and i f
they feel the LZ i s not properl y secured.
Establishing Communication
Si mul taneousl y, communi cati on per sonnel
assi gned to the secur i ty team wi l l establ i sh
communi cati on at the l andi ng si te. I t i s i mportant that
communi cati on personnel know the proper mi ssi on
frequency for contacti ng the pi l ot and keepi ng i n
contact wi th the COC. The type of communi cati on
equi pment needed depends on the terrai n of the LZ.
Usual l y, two PRC 119As that are equi pped wi th a
AS-3683 10-foot whi p antenna are used. Two radi os
ar e r equi r ed because communi cati on must be
mai ntai ned wi th both the pi l ot and the COC.
Casualties
Once the LZ has been secured, casual ti es are
transported from the battal i on ai d stati on to the
l andi ng poi nt by any means necessary. The casual ti es
are arranged i n pri ori ti es and accordi ng to the capaci ty
of the hel i copter.
When en route to the LZ, the hel i copter pi l ot
shoul d i nform the communi cator at the LZ of the
capaci ty of the hel i copter and i f a corpsman i s onboard
the hel i copter. For exampl e, the pi l ot wi l l i nform the
communi cator that the hel i copter has room for three
l i tters and one wal k-on. The medi cal staff wi l l then
arrange the casual ti es i n that order. Casual ti es must
be tagged wi th thei r name, rank, SSN, uni t, and type
of i njuri es. Al l l oose arti cl es of cl othi ng, such as 782
gear, are removed from the casual ti es.
Landing and Loading the Helicopter
Once the pi l ot has acknowl edged the l ocati on of
the LZ by means di scussed previ ousl y i n thi s chapter,
l andi ng si gnal man enl i sted si gnal s are used to l and the
hel i copter. Onl y one person i s desi gnated as the
l andi ng si gnal man. Once the hel i copter has l anded
and a representati ve di sembarks the ai rcraft, the
l andi ng si gnal man di rects the representati ve to
the seni or medi cal staff personnel i n charge. The
hel i copter representati ve wi l l coordi nate wi th the
medi cal staff representati ve on how the casual ti es are
to be l oaded on the ai rcraft. Once al l the casual ti es
have been MEDEVACed, the COC wi l l send a
SALUTE and WI A (or Casual ty CASREP) report to
hi gher headquarters.
SUMMARY
Evacuati on by hel i copter i s the i deal evacuati on
method. Thi s type of evacuati on i s usual l y avai l abl e
day or ni ght. However, hel i copters shoul d be used
wi th di screti on as thei r number i s usual l y l i mi ted and
they draw enemy fi re when observed. The i ndi vi dual
Seabee shoul d be taught basi c fi rst ai d and, i f
wounded, to remai n cal m. I f the wound i s mi nor, a
buddy shoul d appl y a battl e dressi ng and conti nue to
del i ver fi re unti l the acti on l essens. The abi l i ty of a
buddy to gi ve fi rst ai d depends on the tacti cal
si tuati on. Properl y establ i shi ng an LZ and mutes to
the LZ from the BAS i s i mportant to any MEDEVAC
pl an. Pi l ots are just as concerned for thei r safety as
you are about your troops safety. Remember, proper
setup and control of MEDEVAC procedures are
cri ti cal and wi l l ensure that the i ndi vi dual Seabee wi l l
be back to bui l d and fi ght another day.
3-10
CHAPTER 4
PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT OF DEFENSIVE
TACTICS
Seabee battal i ons are pri mari l y a defensi ve
uni t duri ng combat and must consi der the
pl anni ng of defensi ve tacti cs as top pri ori ty. Poor
pl anni ng of defensi ve tacti cs wi l l not onl y
endanger the battal i on but wi l l al so endanger al l
other uni ts i nvol ved wi th the operati on. Other
uni ts assi gned to the theater of operati on depend
on Seabee uni ts to defend thei r area of
responsi bi l i ty. Defensi ve operati ons for Seabee
battal i ons i ncl ude those acti ons taken for
destroyi ng or trappi ng a hosti l e force, denyi ng an
enemy access to an area and reduci ng the
capabi l i ti es of the enemy. The goal i s to
accompl i sh these acti ons wi th mi ni mum or no
l osses to the battal i on. Thi s chapter covers i n
depth the concept of defense, the fundamental s of
defense, the types of defense, and the pl atoon,
squad, and fi re team defensi ve posi ti ons. Al so
covered are the crew-served weapons empl oyment,
the pl atoon fi re pl an, and the company fi re pl an.
Al though thi s chapter speaks mai nl y of defensi ve
tacti cs for a Seabee battal i on, Seabee uni ts can
al so i mpl ement the context of thi s chapter.
CONCEPT OF DEFENSE
I n the defense, the defender takes every
opportuni ty to sei ze the i ni ti ati ve and to destroy
the enemy. The defender sei zes the i ni ti ati ve by
forci ng the enemy to react i n conformi ty wi th the
defensi ve pl an of the battal i on and expl oi ti ng the
enemy weaknesses. As a pl atoon commander or
assi stant company commander, i t i s i mportant for
you to know how the defensi ve pl an rel ates to the
overal l defensi ve operati on. Seabees are requi red
to set up a defensi ve peri meter or, i n extreme
cases, defend the Forward Edge of the Battl e Area
(FEBA). The defensi ve tacti cs used i n each case
are si mi l ar.
NOTE: For si mpl i ci ty purposes the defensi ve
peri meter or the defensi ve l i nes wi l l be referred to
as the FEBA.
DEFENSIVE AREAS
defensi ve areas, establ i shed at the defensi ve
peri meter or FEBA, i ncl ude the securi ty area, the
forward defense area, and the reserve area. Each
of these areas i s al l ocated forces and fi res as a part
of the compl ete defense pl an (fi g. 4-1).
Securit y Area
The battal i on securi ty area begi ns at the FEBA
or the defensi ve peri meter and normal l y extends
500 meters to the front and to the fl anks of the
battal i on. Dependi ng on where battal i on securi ty
el ements are used, thi s area can be i ncreased.
Seabee forces i n the securi ty area i ncl ude the
l i steni ng post, the observati on post, and the
patrol s that furni sh i nformati on about the enemy;
del ay, decei ve, and di srupt the enemy as much as
possi bl e. Di vi si on forces, operati ng deep i n the
securi ty area (beyond 500 meters), wi l l consi st of
general outposts (GOPs), combat outposts, fl ank
securi ty forces, di vi si on aeri al survei l l ance
el ements, and patrol s. As a pl atoon commander or
patrol l eader, you must be aware of al l forces
operati ng i n the securi ty area.
Figure 4 -1 . Bat t alion defens ive areas .
4 -1
Forward Defense Area (FDA)
The forward defense area extends rearward from
the defensi ve l i ne or FEBA to the rear boundari es of
the frontl i ne compani es that are used as the forward
defense echel on of the battal i on. The composi ti on of
the forward defense echel on depends upon the form of
defense used.
Reserve Area
Extendi ng from the rear boundary of the forward
defense echel on (frontl i ne compani es) to the rear
boundary of the defense of the battal i on i s the reserve
area. The reserve forces and those uncommi tted
forces under battal i on control occupy posi ti ons i n the
reserve area and add depth to the defensi ve posi ti on.
The reserve i s the pri nci pal means by whi ch the
battal i on commander i nfl uences the defensi ve battl e
and regai ns the i ni ti ati ve.
FUNDAMENTALS OF DEFENSE
Effecti ve defensi ve acti ons are achi eved by a
bl end of the pri nci pl es di scussed bel ow. The degree
to whi ch each pri nci pl e appl i es wi l l vary wi th the
mi ssi on and the si tuati on. Thi s i s deci ded onl y after
consi derati on of al l the pri nci pl es (fi g. 4-2).
PROPER USE OF TERRAIN
Maneuvers that are possi bl e and di sposi ti ons that
are essenti al are i ndel i bl y wri tten on the ground.
PROPER USE OF TERRAIN
SECURITY
MUTUAL SUPPORT
DEFENSE IN DEPTH
ALL-AROUND DEFENSE
COORDINATED FIRE PLAN
USE OF BARRIERS
FLEXIBILITY
MAXIMUM USE OF OFFENSIVE ACTION
DISPERSION
Figure 4-2.Fundamentals of defense.
4-2
Unfortunate i ndeed i s the pl atoon commander or
assi stant company commander who i s unabl e to read
thi s wri ti ng. The i ntel l i gent l eader knows that
terrai n i s a major al l y and that i t vi rtual l y deci des the
posi ti oni ng of pl atoons and squads i n the defense. The
defender retai ns control of terrai n features essenti al to
obser vati ons, communi cati ons, and maneuver of
reserves. Denyi ng the enemy the use of terrai n that
mi ght jeopardi ze the mi ssi on of the battal i on i s the
major rol e of a defender.
To read the wri ti ng on the ground, you can
organi ze the anal ysi s of weather and terrai n pri mari l y
around the fol l owi ng set of mi l i tary consi derati ons
(KOCOA):
Key terrai n
Observati on and fi el ds of fi re
Conceal ment and cover
Obstacl es to movement
Avenues of approach
These consi der ati ons ar e di scussed i n the
fol l owi ng paragraphs. Whi l e the di scussi ons of these
consi derati ons focus on terrai n, weather and terrai n
are i nseparabl e. Terrai n that offers good traffi c
condi ti ons when dry may be i mpassabl e when wet. A
hi l l that provi des good observati on on a cl ear day may
not provi de any vi si bi l i ty on a rai ny day or at ni ght.
Key Terrain
Key terrai n features must be consi dered i n
formul ati ng defensi ve tacti cs. Thei r sel ecti on i s based
on the mi ssi on of the command. Tacti cal use of terrai n
often i s di rected at i ncreasi ng the abi l i ty to appl y
combat power. Al so consi dered i s channel i ng the
enemy i nto the beaten zone of organi c weapons
mai ntai ned by the battal i on. The sel ecti on of key
terrai n vari es wi th the fol l owi ng:
. Level of command
l Type of uni t
. Mi ssi on of the uni t
Seabees are normal l y a servi ce support uni t for the
Mari ne Ai r-Ground Task Force (MAGTF). Servi ce
support uni ts need roads over whi ch to move suppl i es
and secure areas i n whi ch to construct faci l i ti es.
Avi ati on uni ts need hi gh terrai n on whi ch to set up
radars and communi cati on faci l i ti es and l arge, fl at
areas for ai rfi el ds.
Observation and Fields of Fire
Observati on and fi el ds of fi re are so cl osel y
rel ated that they are consi dered together. Fi el ds of fi re
are based on observati on because a target must be seen
to bri ng effecti ve fi re upon i t.
The observati on consi derati ons are as fol l ows:
. Weather condi ti ons
. Ti me of day
. Vegetati on
. Sur r oundi ng ter r ai n
The hi ghest terrai n features are general l y i deal for
observati on. However, duri ng ti mes of poor vi si bi l i ty,
posi ti ons i n l ow areas that the enemy must pass
through may provi de better observati on.
The fi el d of fi re i s the area a weapon or group of
weapons may cover effecti vel y wi th fi re from a gi ven
posi ti on. When you are sel ecti ng a fi el d of fi re for a
weapon, i t i s cri ti cal to know the capabi l i ti es of the
weapon. Posi ti oni ng an M60E3 machi ne gun wi th a
400-meter fi el d of fi re i s poorl y usi ng the weapons
capabi l i ty consi deri ng the weapon has a maxi mum
effecti ve range 1,100 meters. The object is to engage
the enemy as far out as possible.
Cover and Concealment
Cover and conceal ment i s used together to
pr ovi de pr otecti on fr om the effects of fi r es and
observati on.
1. Cover i s protecti on from the effects of fi re.
Exampl es of i deal cover are as fol l ows:
Rocks
Shel l craters
Di tches or quarri es
Bui l di ngs
Caves
Sunken roads
Ri ver banks
Wal l s
Fol ds i n the ground
Hi ghway fi l l s
Areas that provi de cover from di rect fi re may
or may not protect agai nst the effects of i ndi rect
fi re.
2. Conceal ment i s the protecti on from observati on
or survei l l ance both ai r and ground. Some exampl es
that provi de i deal conceal ment are as fol l ows
Woods
Underbrush
Snowdri fts
Tal l grass
Cul ti vated vegetati on
Other features that deny observati on
Terrai n that provi des conceal ment may or may not
provi de cover.
Obstacles to Movement
Obstacl es are anythi ng, i ncl udi ng a natural or
arti fi ci al terrai n feature, that stops, i mpedes, or di verts
mi l i tary movement. Entangl ements are set up as
obstacl es al ong the FEBA or the defensi ve peri meter
to channel the enemy i nto the beaten zone of vari ous
weapons hel d by the defendi ng uni t.
Avenues of Approach
Avenues of approach are routes the enemy i s l i kel y
to travel to reach i ts objecti ve. When setti ng up the
defense posi ti ons, the pl atoon commander vi sual i zes
al l possi bl e enemy avenues of approach i nto the area.
An eval uati on of the avenues of appr oach,
together wi th key terrai n features, serves as the basi s
for posi ti oni ng pl atoons or squads for pl anni ng fi re
support. The area sel ected for defense shoul d afford
good observati on, fi el ds of fi re, and adequate cover
and conceal ment to the defendi ng for ces. The
defender appl i es the pri nci pl es of camoufl age and
conti nuousl y i mproves camoufl age throughout the
defensi ve operati on.
SECURITY
Securi ty consi sts of those measures that prevent
sur pr i se, avoi d annoyance, pr eser ve fr eedom of
acti on, and deny to the enemy i nformati on about our
forces. Securi ty i s not onl y keepi ng watch to detect
the enemy but al so decei vi ng the enemy as to the
strength of the battal i on, l ocati on of the weapons, and
other val uabl e i nfor mati on. Usi ng camoufl age
effecti vel y i s very i mportant to securi ty.
4-3
MUTUAL SUPPORT
A wel l -devel oped defense pl an i ncl udes mutual
suppor t fr om adjacent uni ts. Seabee uni ts ar e
normal l y attached to an MAGTF and have a vari ety of
mutual support. However, condi ti ons, created by
wi de uni t separ ati on, i ncr ease the pr obl em of
achi evi ng mutual support. Support of adjacent uni ts
by fi re can be hampered by di stances that exceed the
ranges of the supporti ng uni ts organi c weapons and
must be consi dered when seeki ng mutual support.
Mutual support becomes cri ti cal when conducti ng a
convoy. Normal l y the convoy wi l l travel out of range
from a Seabee uni ts organi c weapons, so mutual
support from adjacent uni ts becomes cri ti cal .
ALL-AROUND DEFENSE
Al though the pl atoon commander posi ti ons the
squads toward the expected di recti on of an enemy
attack the pl atoon must be prepared to defend agai nst
an attack from any di recti on. The possi bi l i ty of
mu l t i - d i r e ct i on e n e my a t t a ck s , i n cl u d i n g
hel i copterborne or ai rborne attack, i ncreases the
i mportance of thi s pri nci pl e. Al l -around defense i s
best achi eved by earl y warni ng and the rapi d shi fti ng
of pl atoons i nto suppl ementary fi ghti ng posi ti ons to
counter a devel opi ng attack. The topi c of fi ghti ng
posi ti ons i s di scussed further i n thi s chapter. Earl y
warni ng capabi l i ty provi ded by ai r defense el ements
of the Mari ne Ai rcraft Wi ng (MAW) can provi de
defense agai nst hel i copterborne or ai rborne attacks.
IN-DEPTH DEFENSE
Maxi mum defense i n depth i s requi red to absorb
an enemy attack wi thi n the battl e area. Defense i n
depth appl i es to the squad l evel by engagi ng the enemy
at maxi mum smal l -arms range as i t advances and
conti nui ng thi s fi re unti l the enemy has been stopped.
The requi rement for depth i s i ncreased when the
enemy i s superi or i n mobi l i ty or has the capabi l i ty of
destroyi ng or rupturi ng defensi ve posi ti ons by usi ng
nucl ear weapons. Organi zed i n-depth posi ti ons must
control key terrai n, bl ock avenues of approach, reduce
the defenders vul nerabi l i ty to nucl ear weapons, and
assi st the maneuver of the reserve troops.
COORDINATED FIRE PLAN
Coordi nati on of al l fi re from weapons organi c and
supporti ng the battal i on i s consi dered. I ncl uded i n a
coordi nated fi re pl an i s naval gunfi re and tacti cal
avi ati on support usual l y provi ded by the Mari ne Ai r
Group (MAG). Coordi nati on between the compani es
i s al so cri ti cal . The fi re of the squad forces the enemy
to sl owdown and depl oy, thus creati ng a target for the
mortar crew of the battal i on, adjacent compani es, or
supporti ng weapons. Thi s makes the squads a key
el ement i n a coordi nated fi re pl an.
COORDINATED BARRIER PLAN
Usi ng barri ers, ei ther natural or man-made,
can channel , di r ect, r estr i ct, or stop enemy
movement. The effecti ve use of barbed wi re and
concerti na, cl aymore mi nes, anti tank mi nes, and
anti personnel mi nes, and the effecti ve use of the
ter r ai n add to the defense of the battal i on.
Natural obstacl es must be expl oi ted. The creati on
or expl oi tati on of barri ers must be coordi nated at
al l echel ons of the command.
FLEXIBILITY
A pl atoon commander must conti nual l y devel op
vari ous courses of acti on to meet the enemy threat.
Bei ng fl exi bl e i s to ask yoursel f, What shoul d I do i f
the enemy does thi s?
DISPERSION
Normal l y i n a defensi ve si tuati on, squads are
l i mi ted to how spread out they are over a wi de area.
Fi ri ng posi ti ons are assi gned and shoul d be cl ose
enough to provi de i nterl ocki ng fi re. They shoul d not
be cl ose enough so an enemy machi ne gun or mortar
can wi pe out an enti re fi re team or an enti re squad.
The degree of di spersi on wi l l be i nfl uenced pri mari l y
by the mi ssi on and by the fol l owi ng:
. Terrai n
. Fri endl y and enemy ai r si tuati on
l Mobi l i ty of opposi ng forces
. Enemy nucl ear capabi l i ty
. Responsi veness of fr i endl y nucl ear and
conventi onal fi re support
USE OF TIME AVAILABLE
Si nce the defender can exami ne the terrai n i n
detai l and pl an i ts best use, every effort i s made to
prepare the defense i n advance. The ti me avai l abl e for
pl anni ng and prepari ng for the defense wi l l i nfl uence
the fol l owi ng:
4-4
Tacti cal empl oyment of the compani es
Preparati on of obstacl es
Coordi nati on of fi re from each company
Coordi nati on of supporti ng fi re
Pri ori ty for performance of tasks
The effecti veness of the defense depends not onl y
on the ti me avai l abl e for i ts pl anni ng and preparati on
but al so on i ts advantageous use duri ng the preparati on
phase. Thi s fundamental al so appl i es after the
preparati on phase because i mprovement conti nues
duri ng the defense.
POSITIONING THE SQUAD IN THE
DEFENSE
The effecti veness of a uni t i n combat i s l argel y
dependent on sel ecti ng fi ri ng posi ti ons that al l ow the
weapons of the uni t to be used effecti vel y and to keep
the enemy from usi ng thei r weapons. A pri mary duty
as a pl atoon commander or squad l eader for a ri fl e
pl atoon i s posi ti oni ng the squads i n the defense.
When you are empl oyi ng a squad i n the defense, i t i s
good to revi ew your previ ous experi ences as a squad
member . Refl ect upon the r easons you wer e
posi ti oned as a ri fl eman, grenadi er, or other member
of a squad to better determi ne what type of defensi ve
fi ri ng posi ti on i s needed. There are many poi nts to
consi der i n sel ecti ng a fi ri ng posi ti on. Some of these
are as fol l ows:
1. Mission: I f the mi ssi on of the uni t i s to defend
an ai rfi el d, the fi ri ng posi ti ons of the uni t must faci l i tate
the accompl i shment of the mi ssi on, despi te how good
other fi ri ng posi ti ons may be.
2. Enemy: The capabi l i ti es of an enemy usual l y
determi ne how he wi l l attack. Mechani zed uni ts
usual l y attack through fi el ds and other open terrai n
where they can use the speed of thei r vehi cl es to an
advantage. I nfantry uni ts, however, seek to use the
cover and conceal ment provi ded by woods and other
cl ose terrai n. Fi ri ng posi ti ons that are i deal for
defendi ng agai nst mechani zed uni ts maybe usel ess for
defendi ng agai nst i nfantry uni ts.
3. Observation and Fields of Fire: Seek to fi re
on the enemy when he cannot fi re on you and do not l et
the enemy fi re on you when you cannot fi re on hi m.
4. Plan of Defense/Scheme of Maneuver: How
the battal i on commander pl ans to use the compani es
wi l l i nfl uence the sel ecti on of fi ri ng posi ti ons. For
exampl e, i f the battal i on commander pl ans to surpri se
the enemy, fi ri ng posi ti ons shoul d be sel ected that al l ow
the fi re of al l or most of the weapons can be brought to
bear on the enemy si mul taneousl y.
The fol l owi ng paragraphs wi l l di scuss what forms
a basi c defensi ve fi ri ng posi ti on.
SECTOR OF FIRE
A sector of fi re (fi g. 4-3) i s an area of responsi -
bi l i ty assi gned to a squad, a pl atoon, or a crew-sewed
weapon to be covered by fi re. The squad sector of fi re
i s di vi ded i nto fi re teams and i ndi vi dual sectors of fi re
to cover the enti re squad sector by fi re. Sectors of fi re
ensure mutual support by overl appi ng the i ndi vi dual
and fi re team sectors. Normal l y, the squad l eader i s
not assi gned an i ndi vi dual sector of fi re si nce the
pr i mar y duty i n the defense i s di r ecti ng and
control l i ng the squad. Located wi thi n each sector of
fi re are l ateral and forward l i mi ts.
1. Lateral Limits: Readi l y i denti fi abl e terrai n
features are sel ected to show the l i ne of si ght al ong each
si de of the sector. Two stakes are fi rml y pl aced near the
posi ti on of a weapon to show the l ateral l i mi ts for
peri ods of reduced vi si bi l i ty.
2. Forward Limits: The for war d l i mi t i s
establ i shed at the range at whi ch the weapon wi l l open
fi re. When possi bl e, a terrai n feature i s sel ected to
l ocate the forward l i mi t. Thi s al l ows the squad l eader
a method of control to open fi re on the enemy at a
preci se ti me to maxi mi ze effecti veness.
Figure 4-3.Sector of fire.
4-5
FIGHTING POSITIONS
A fi ghti ng posi ti on i s a l ocati on on the ground
from whi ch fi re i s del i vered by an i ndi vi dual , a fi re
uni t (squad or fi re team), or a crew-served weapon.
Before you sel ect a fi ghti ng posi ti on, the assi gned
sector of fi re i s careful l y exami ned from vari ous
l ocati ons. Exami ni ng i s done i n the prone posi ti on to
ensure effecti ve coverage of the sector of fi re. The
posi ti ons must provi de the fol l owi ng:
Desi red support of the sector
Good fi el ds of fi r e
Max i mu m u s e of av ai l abl e cov er an d
conceal ment
Faci l i tate effecti ve fi re control by the uni t l eader
Careful l y exami ne assi gned sectors of fi re from
the prone posi ti on, and then sel ect a fi ghti ng posi ti on
to ensure effecti ve coverage of the sector. Pri mary,
al ternate, suppl ementary, and battl e fi ghti ng posi ti ons
must be establ i shed (fi g. 4-4).
NOTE: Range cards must be compl eted for each
fi ghti ng posi ti on. Range cards wi l l be di scussed
further i n thi s chapter.
Primary Fighting Position
The pr i mar y fi ghti ng posi ti on i s the best
av ai l abl e pos i ti on fr om wh i ch th e as s i gn ed
sector of fi re can cover. I ndi vi dual s, fi re teams,
Figure 4-4.Defensive firing positions.
squads, and cr ew-ser ved weapons ar e assi gned
pri mary posi ti ons.
Alternate Fighting Position
Al ternate posi ti ons are not normal l y assi gned to
i ndi vi dual s or squads wi thi n the pl atoon. They are
used pri mari l y by crew-served weapons. An al ternate
posi ti on i s l ocated so that a crew-served weapon can
conti nue to cover the ori gi nal assi gned sector of fi re
when the pri mary posi ti on becomes unsui ted for
carryi ng out that mi ssi on.
Supplementary Fighting Position
Suppl ementary posi ti ons are prepared to guard
agai nst attack from di recti ons other than those from
whi ch the mai n attack i s expected. A suppl ementary
posi ti on i s a secondary posi ti on that does not cover the
same sector of fi r e as the pr i mar y posi ti on.
Suppl ementary posi ti ons are for securi ty reasons and
ensure protecti on, when occupi ed agai nst surpri se
enemy attack fr om an unexpected di r ecti on.
Movements to suppl ementary posi ti ons and conceal ed
routes are covered to avoi d enemy detecti on.
Battle Position
The battl e posi ti on i s where the mai n effort of
defense i s concentrated. Compani es and pl atoons are
assi gned battl e posi ti ons. The battl e posi ti on i s made
up of a seri es of sectors of fi re that support and
i nterl ock one another. Based on the battl e posi ti on of
the company, pl atoon battl e posi ti ons are assi gned a
ri ght and l eft l i mi t of fi re i n whi ch gunfi re can be
del i ver ed.
PRINCIPAL DIRECTION Of FIRE (PDF)
A pri nci pal di recti on of fi re (PDF) i s a speci fi c
di recti on wi thi n a sector of fi re of a fl at trajectory
weapon i ncl udi ng crew-sei ned weapons. The PDF i s
desi gnated as the pri mary fi re mi ssi on for that weapon.
Never assign more than one PDF per weapon.
Assi gn a PDF usi ng a terrai n feature. Usi ng a stake to
gui de the PDF duri ng reduced vi si bi l i ty i s vi tal to the
effecti ve fi ri ng of a PDF (fi g. 4-5).
The PDF i s used as fol l ows:
1. To cover a gap i n a fi nal protecti ve l i ne (FPL)
of a crew-served weapon
2. To cover a speci fi c terrai n feature endangeri ng
the company or pl atoon battl e posi ti on, such as draws,
4-6
Figure 4 -5 . Princ ipal dire c t ion of fire .
that may sei ne as an avenue of approach or a
hi l l top that may serve as a possi bl e enemy vantage
poi nt
3. To protect a crew-served weapon by fi ri ng
across i ts front
4. To augment the band of fl ank fi re pl aced
i mmedi atel y i n front of the FEBA or the defensi ve
l i ne when them are no vi si bl e targets of
opportuni ty to the front
FIRE TEAM IN THE DEFENSE
A pri mary duty of a squad l eader i s to organi ze
the fi re teams i n the defense. Thi s i s accompl i shed
by speci fyi ng a sector of fi re for the squad and
PDF for each automati c ri fl eman. The squad
l eader must i nform the fi re team l eader of any
crew-served weapons, augmented from the
weapons pl atoon, whi ch wi l l hel p i n coveri ng the
assi gned sector of fi re. The squad l eader and the
fi re team l eader wi l l sel ect terrai n features to
show l ateral and forward l i mi ts of the assi gned
sector of fi re. The mi ssi on of the fi re team i s to
stop the enemy forward of the FEBA or to repel
the enemy by cl ose combat i f the enemy reaches
the FEBA.
FIRE PLAN
The fi re team l eader formul ates a fi re pl an to
cover the enti re sector assi gned by the squad
l eader wi th the heavi est possi bl e vol ume of fi re
(fi g. 4-6 and appendi x I I ).
Figure 4 . 6 . Fire t eam fire plan.
The fi re pl an i ncl udes the fol l owi ng:
I ndi vi dual sectors of fi re

I ndi vi dual fi ghti ng posi ti ons

Automati c ri fl emen PDF assi gned by the
squad l eader or pl atoon commander

Crew-served weapon posi ti ons

Key terrai n features

Posi ti on of the fi re team l eader
INDIVIDUAL SECTORS OF FIRE
I f practi cal , each member i n the fi re team
shoul d cover the enti re sector of fi re of the fi re
team. The same terrai n featues are used to show
the l i mi ts.
INDIVIDUAL FIGHTING POSITIONS
Each member of the fi re team i s l ocated so as to
occupy an assi gned posi ti on that al l ows the team
to cover, by fi re, the assi gned sector. Posi ti ons
maybe prepared as si ngl e-or doubl e-fi ghti ng hol es;
however, doubl e hol es are preferred. I f doubl e-
fi ghti ng hol es are prepared, the automati c
ri fl eman and assi stant automati c ri fl eman wi l l
pai r off. Crew-served weapons fi ghti ng posi ti ons
are more detai l ed and wi l l be di scussed further i n
thi s chapter.
The i nterval between fi ghti ng posi ti ons wi thi n
a fi re team vari es between 5 to 20 meters. I n
dense terrai n, si ngl e-fi ghti ng posi ti ons are usual l y
prepared and are 5 meters apart, I n open terrai n,
si ngl e hol es may be 10 meters apart; doubl e-
fi ghti ng posi ti ons, 20 meters apart.
4 -7
AUTOMATIC RIFLEMAN
Si nce the automati c ri fl es are the backbone of the
defense of the squad, the squad l eader sel ects the exact
fi ghti ng posi ti on. The remai nder of the fi re team i s
then posi ti oned around the automati c ri fl es. The PDF
of the automati c ri fl es are sel ected by the pl atoon
commander or the squad l eader.
RIFLEMAN
A ri fl eman i s posi ti oned so he can cover the enti re
fi re team sector. The posi ti on must provi de support
and protecti on for the automati c ri fl eman.
GRENADIER
The squad l eader posi ti ons the grenadi er where the
M203 grenade l auncher i s most effecti ve. I n combat,
the grenadi er i s usual l y cl ose to the squad l eader. The
squad l eader may choose to use the grenadi er to cover
dead space i n the defense.
FIRE TEAM LEADER
Usual l y the posi ti on of the fi re team l eader i s at
the center of the fi re team from whi ch he can perform
the fol l owi ng:
l Observe the enti re fi re team and i ts sector of fi re.
. Di rect the fi re of the automati c ri fl e.
. Observe the squad l eader.
FIRE PLAN SKETCH
A sketch of the fi re pl an i s submi tted by the fi re
team l eader to the squad l eader. The magneti c North
l i ne provi des a reference to show the di recti on the fi re
team i s faci ng. Fi gure 4-7 shows the meani ng of the
vari ous symbol s.
SQUAD IN THE DEFENSE
The pl atoon commander assi gns each squad a
defensi ve mi ssi on speci fyi ng a sector of fi re and a
pri mary posi ti on. Terrai n features are sel ected to show
the l ateral and forward l i mi ts of the sector of fi re of
the squad. The pl atoon commander desi gnates the
general fi ri ng posi ti ons and the PDF for speci fi c
automati c ri fl es or crew-served weapons, whi ch are
cr i ti cal to the defense of the enti r e pl atoon.
Desi gnated on-cal l tar gets ar e establ i shed and
coor di nated wi th the Combat Oper ati on Center
(COC). Suppl ementary posi ti ons are assi gned to the
squads for al l -around defense and to protect the fl anks
or the rear of the pl atoon (fi g. 4-8 and appendi x I I ).
SQUAD FIRE PLAN
The squad l eader formul ates a basi c squad fi re
pl an to occupy physi cal l y the assi gned pri mary
posi ti on and to cover, by fi re, the sector assi gned by
the pl atoon commander. The fi re pl an i ncl udes the
Figure 4-7.Fire plan sketch and symbols.
4-8
Figure 4-8.Squad position.
assi gnment of the sectors of fi re of the fi re team and
PDF for automati c ri fl es or crew-served weapons (fi g.
4-9).
FIRE TEAM POSITIONS
Fi re teams are di stri buted so they physi cal l y
occupy the assi gned posi ti on and can cover, by fi re,
the assi gned sector. The fi re teams are normal l y
pl aced abreast, fi ri ng the FEBA. Terrai n di ctates
the effecti ve pl acement of the i ndi vi dual members
of each fi re team. Pl ace crew-served weapons fi rst,
so the posi ti on of the squad can provi de cl ose-i n
protecti on for these weapons.
AUTOMATIC RIFLES
The pl atoon commander norm al l y desi gnates the
general fi ri ng posi ti on of a speci fi c automati c weapon
or crew-served weapon; however, thi s responsi bi l i ty y
may be del egated to the squad l eader. I f so, the squad
l eader wi l l desi gnate the PDF for each automati c
weapon or crew-served weapon.
SQUAD LEADER POSITION
The posi ti on of the squad l eader i s usual l y sl i ghtl y
to the rear of the fi re teams and to the center of the
squad. From thi s posi ti on the squad l eader shoul d be
abl e to observe the fol l owi ng:
. Assi gned sector of fi re.
. Observe as much of the squad as possi bl e.
l Mai ntai n contact wi th the pl atoon commander.
SQUAD FIRE PLAN SKETCH
Based upon the fi re pl an sketch recei ved from the
fi re team l eaders, the squad l eader prepares a squad
fi re pl an sketch. Two copi es are prepared-one for the
squad l eader and the other for the pl atoon commander
The sketch shoul d i ncl ude the fol l owi ng:
Fi re team posi ti ons and sectors of fi re
Posi ti on and PDF of the automati c ri fl es
Crew-served weapons posi ti on
Pri mary fi re mi ssi ons (FPL or PDF)
Approved on-cal l targets
Squad l eader posi ti on
Terrai n features and esti mated ranges to them
Di recti on of magneti c North
Figure 4-9.Squad fire plan.
4-9
Figure 4-10.Squad fire plan sketch.
PLATOON IN THE DEFENSE
terrai n or the fl ank of an adjacent pl atoon. A di stance
from the FEBA to the rear i s al so descri bed (fi g. 4-11).
Located wi thi n the assi gned company battl e area
FRONTAGE
i s the pl atoon defense area. The company commander
assi gns the pl atoon a frontage. The frontage l eft and
The terrai n and the si ze of the company battl e area
ri ght l i mi ts are taken from a reference poi nt on the
di ctates the frontage assi gned to a pl atoon. Physi cal
Figure 4-11Frontline platoon defense area.
4-10
frontage i s the area that i s physi cal l y occupi ed by the
pl atoon. I t can be up to 450 meters.
DEPTH
The depth of a pl atoon defense area i s the di stance
between the squad pri mary posi ti ons and the rearward
extensi on of thei r suppl ementary posi ti ons. I t maybe
up to 200 meters.
SECURITY AREA
The pl atoon i s assi gned part of the company
securi ty area forward of the FEBA. Thi s i s the area
where the company sends out patrol s. I t i s i mportant
as a pl atoon commander to know when and where a
patrol wi l l cross i nto hi s securi ty area Coordi nati on
between pl atoon commander s and the company
commander on the posi ti ons of l i steni ng posts,
observati on posts, and earl y warni ng devi ces i s
essenti al .
PLAN OF DEFENSE
The pl an of defense of the pl atoon commander
consi sts of a wel l -devel oped fi re support pl an that i s
i ntegrated wi th the fi re support and barri er pl anni ng
of the company. Cl ose combi nati on wi th the other
pl atoon commanders assi gned to the company i s
cri ti cal . Basi cal l y, the pl an of defense of the pl atoon
consi sts of assi gni ng each squad a posi ti on on the
terrai n and a sector of fi re. The pl an of defense resul ts
fr om the esti mate of the si tuati on and the
fundamental s of defense of the pl atoon commander
di scussed previ ousl y i n thi s chapter.
FIRE SUPPORT PLAN
The pl atoon commander coordi nates wi th the
weapons pl atoon commander concerni ng crew-served
weapons and fi nal protecti ve l i nes (FPLs). The
defensi ve fi re pl an of the pl atoon i s i ntegrated wi th the
fi re pl an of the company.
Once the pri mary posi ti ons of the squads are
determi ned, the pl atoon commander sel ects the sector
of fi re of the squad. The sectors of the squads overl ap
and cover the porti on of the company battl e posi ti on
assi gned to the pl atoon. The sectors of fi re of the fl ank
squads overl ap the adjacent pl atoons fl ank squads
sectors of fi re, and the i nterl ocki ng fi re provi des
mutual support (fi g. 4-1 2).
When a gap exi ts between adjacent pl atoons,
proper coverage i s accompl i shed by use of i ndi rect fi re
(fi g. 4-13).
PLATOON FIRE PLAN SKETCH
The pl atoon commander prepares a fi re pl an
sketch or overl ay based from the fi re pl an sketches of
the squad l eader. A pl atoon fi re pl an sketch or overl ay
Figure 4-12.Mutual support provided by flank fire.
4-11
Figure 4-13.Coverage for a gap.
i s submi tted to the company commander for approval
The sketch or overl ay i ncl udes the fol l owi ng:
Squad pri mary posi ti on and sectors of fi re
Posi ti ons and PDFs for al l automati c ri fl es
i ncl udi ng crew-served weapons
Locati on of pl atoon or company observati on
post
FPLs of al l weapons l ocated i n pl atoon defense
area
On-cal l targets
Bar r i er s and ear l y war ni ng devi ces
Cl aymore mi nes
ORGANIZING THE PLATOON
IN THE DEFENSE
The task of organi zi ng the pl atoon i n the defense
begi ns i mmedi atel y upon arri val of the company.
Work commences i n the order of pri ori ty establ i shed
by the company commander. Top pri ori ti es for the
pl atoon normal l y i ncl ude the fol l owi ng acti ons i n
order of i mportance:
l Establ i sh securi ty.
. Hasti l y set up a communi cati on network.
l Posi ti on automati c and crew-served weapons.
Cl ear fi el ds of fi re.
Assi gn sectors of fi re and PDFs.
Prepare fi ghti ng posi ti ons.
Pl an, coordi nate, and pl ot avai l abl e fi re support.
I nstal l tacti cal and suppl ementary wi re.
Lay and bury wi re for the fi nal communi cati on
network.
Pr epar e other obstacl es i ncl udi ng cl aymor es and
protecti ve wi re.
Prepare al ternate posi ti ons.
Prepare suppl ementary posi ti ons.
NOTE: The pl atoon commander must have
constant communi cati on wi th the squad l eaders and
the company CP.
CREW-SERVED WEAPONS
Cr ew-ser ved weapons ar e the fi r e suppor t
el ements of the r i fl e compani es. The weapons
pl atoons and the 60-mm mor tar pl atoons ar e
r esponsi bl e for the cr ew-ser ved weapons. Thei r
purpose i s to provi de each company wi th organi c
machi ne gun support, mortar fi re support, and anti tank
defense capabi l i ty.
4-12
Figure 4-14.Platoon fire plan sketch.
WEAPONS PLATOON
Al fa, Bravo, Charl i e, and Del ta compani es each
have a weapons pl atoon. Terrai n wi l l di ctate the
number of crew-served weapons assi gned to each
pl atoon. The weapons pl atoon i s normal l y composed
of the fol l owi ng crew-sewed weapons:
M60E3 machi ne gun
.50 cal i ber machi ne gun
M19 grenade l auncher
M136, 84-mm l auncher AT4 anti tank weapon
NOTE: Refer to the Seabee Combat Handbook,
Vol ume 1, for the characteri sti cs of crew-served
weapons and the weapons pl atoon organi zati on.
Weapons Platoon Commander
Si mi l ar to the ri fl e pl atoons, the weapons pl atoon
commander must have constant communi cati on wi th
the squad l eaders responsi bl e for the crew-served
weapon teams.
The weapons pl atoon commander
conducts hi s r econnai ssance wi th the company
commander or i s di rected to conduct i t separatel y. I n
ei ther case, the weapons pl atoon commander pl ans the
empl oyment of the weapons pl atoon. Duri ng the
pl anni ng, i t i s i mportant that the weapons pl atoon
commander works wi th the ri fl e pl atoon commanders.
The pl anni ng i ncl udes the fol l owi ng:
Fi ghti ng posi ti ons for crew-served weapons
FPLs and PDFs for machi ne guns
Pri mary and al ternate posi ti ons for machi ne
guns
Sector of fi re for each machi ne gun squad
4-13
Sectors of fi re for each assaul t team
Covered wai ti ng posi ti ons for the assaul t teams
Pri mary and al ternate posi ti ons for the assaul t
teams
The sel ecti on of the weapons pl atoon commander
i s the substance of recommendati ons made to the
company commander for the pr i mar y defensi ve
empl oyment of the weapons pl atoon. Whi l e on
reconnai ssance, the weapons pl atoon commander al so
sel ects suppl ementary posi ti ons, as necessary, from
whi ch the machi ne gun team may perform other
defensi ve mi ssi ons.
Fire Support Plan
The company commander exerci ses control of the
weapons pl atoon thr ough the weapons pl atoon
commander . He exer ci ses contr ol for the most
effecti ve defensi ve empl oyment of the company. The
weapons pl atoon commander ensures i ts effecti veness
by prepari ng a detai l ed pl an consi stent wi th the
r ecommen d a ti on a ccep ted by th e comp a n y
commander. A fi re support pl an i s prepared by the
weapons pl atoon commander. The pl an i s based upon
an esti mate of the si tuati on, the fundamental s of
defense previ ousl y di scussed, and a sound knowl edge
of crew-sewed weapon empl oyment.
M60E3 Machine Gun Section
The machi ne gun secti on i s a major el ement of fi re
support for stoppi ng the enemy assaul t i mmedi atel y i n
front of the battl e area. I n a wel l -organi zed defense,
most of the fi nal protecti ve fi re (FPF) of the company
i s del i vered by the machi ne gun secti on. The posi ti ons
of the machi ne guns are pl anned pri mari l y for thi s
purpose. Rol es of the M60E3 machi ne gun secti on are
as fol l ows:
Support the ri fl eman i n the offense and defense.
Provi de heavy vol umes of control l ed, accurate,
and conti nuous fi re.
Engage predetermi ne targets under al l vi si bi l i ty
condi ti ons.
Provi de l ong range, cl ose defensi ve, and fi nal
protecti ve fri es (FPFs).
Basi s for FPFs i n the overal l defensi ve fi re pl an.
Cover l i kel y avenues of approach.
Provi de grazi ng fi re.
Use of .50 Caliber Machine Gun
I n general , the rol es of the .50 cal i ber machi ne gun
are si mi l ar to the M60E3. The major di fference i s that
the .50 cal i ber machi ne gun ammuni ti on can penetrate
l i ght armor. The addi ti onal rol es of the .50 cal i ber
machi ne gun are as fol l ows:
l Provi de protecti on for motori zed movements.
. Destroy l i ghtl y armored vehi cl es.
. Defend agai nst l ow-fl yi ng hosti l e ai rcraft.
M19 Grenade Launcher
The rol e of the M19 grenade l auncher i s si mi l ar to
the M60E3 and .50 cal i ber machi ne guns. The weapon
can be used to provi de i ndi rect or di rect fi ri ng. Li ke
most machi ne guns, the M19 grenade l auncher can be
mounted on a vehi cl e.
AT4 Antitank Weapon
Pri mari l y, the M136, 84-mm AT4 anti tank weapon
i s used agai nst armored personnel carri ers; however,
i t can be used to di sabl e a battl e tank by stri ki ng the
si de or rear of the tank The AT4 can be fi red from the
ri ght shoul der onl y.
MACHINE GUN TACTICAL
EMPLOYMENT
The basi c uni t of machi ne gun empl oyment i n
defense i s the squad. Machi ne gun squads consi st of
a squad l eader and two four-man machi ne gun teams.
Machi ne guns used on the FEBA are normal l y used by
squads.
Employment of Machine Guns
Machi ne gun squads used on the FEBA are
normal l y assi gned a fi nal protecti ve l i ne (FPL) and a
sector of fi re or a pri nci pal di recti on of fi re (PDF).
Both machi ne guns of the squad fi re the same general
FPL and sector of fi re from posi ti ons a mi ni mum of
35 meters apart.
Based on terrai n, i t may be necessary to spl i t some
squads to provi de effecti ve machi ne gun coverage. A
machi ne gun squad i s spl i t when each of i ts guns has
been assi gned a di fferent fi ri ng mi ssi on; that i s, a
di fferent fi nal protecti ve l i ne or pri nci pal di recti on of
fi re and sector of fi re. A machi ne gun squad i s spl i t
onl y when necessary. I f the squad i s spl i t, the two
4-14
guns shoul d be used as cl ose to each other as the
machi ne gun fi re pl an wi l l al l ow. Thi s acti on ensures
i nterl ocki ng fi re, ease of control , and suppl i es (fi g.
4-15).
Machine Gun Final Protective Lines
Effecti ve fi nal protecti ve fi re i s characteri zed by
the fol l owi ng:
1. Flanking: Maxi mum fl anki ng fi re i s desi rabl e.
The more frontal the fi re, the l ess effecti ve the coverage
of the company front.
2. Interlocking: I nterl ocki ng fi re adds to the
effecti veness of the fi re pl an. Such fi re reduces the
number of gaps i n the fi nal protecti ve l i nes and provi des
mutual support between adjacent uni ts.
3. Grazing: Fi nal protecti ve l i nes are l ocated to
obtai n maxi mum grazi ng fi re. Grazi ng fi re i s fi re i n
whi ch the trajectory of the bul l ets does not ri se above
the hei ght of a man, standi ng. On fl at or uni forml y
sl opi ng terrai n, machi ne gun fi re grazes to a maxi mum
range of 700 meters from the gun. Fi gure 4-16 shows
a proper techni que for graphi cal l y di spl ayi ng fi nal
protecti ve fi re and gaps i n i ts grazi ng fi re on an overl ay
or sketch.
Machine Gun Sector of Fire
A sector of fi re i s assi gned to each machi ne gun
squad. A machi ne gun sector of fi re does not normal l y
exceed 800 roi l s (45 degrees). Adjacent machi ne gun
squad sectors shoul d overl ap. Preferabl y, the fi nal
protecti ve l i ne compri ses the near boundary of the
sector. I t maybe l ocated wi thi n the sector when the
grazi ng fi re i s sl i ghtl y more frontal than desi rabl e and
machi ne gun fi re coverage cl oser to the FEBA i s
requi red.
Machine Gun Principal Direction of Fire
When the terrai n does not al l ow for an effecti ve
fi nal protecti ve l i ne, machi ne guns on the FEBA may
be assi gned pri nci pal di recti ons of fi re for coveri ng
dangerous avenues of approach. I n such si tuati ons,
the pri nci pal di recti on of fi re may fal l wi thi n the sector
of fi re or compri se ei ther of i ts boundari es.
NOTE: A machi ne gun cannot be assi gned a fi nal
protecti ve l i ne (FPL) and a pri nci pal di recti on of fi re
(PDF).
Machine Gun Communications
Whenever possi bl e, the pri mary posi ti ons of the
machi ne gun squad are provi ded wi th sound-powered
tel ephone communi cati ons on the company wi re net
Figure 4-15.Machine guns split.
4-15
Figure 4-16.Machine guns FPL and grazing fire.
to the weapons pl atoon commander. I f ti me permi ts,
wi re i s l ai d to al ternate and suppl ementary posi ti ons.
Messengers are used when wi re communi cati ons are
i noperati ve or have not been i nstal l ed.
AT4 TACTICAL EMPLOYMENT
The assaul t squad i s the basi c uni t for the tacti cal
empl oyment of the AT4 anti tank weapon. Because of
the shor t r ange of the AT4, they ar e nor mal l y
posi ti oned wi th the frontl i ne pl atoons to provi de
cl ose-i n anti tank defense. The weapons pl atoon
comma n der n or ma l l y u s es a mes s en ger to
communi cate wi th the assaul t squads.
Positions of Assault Squads
The l ocati on of the best observati on and fi el ds of
fi re coveri ng the avenues of approach for armor
vehi cl es di ctates the posi ti oni ng of assaul t squads. A
pri mary and several al ternate fi ri ng posi ti ons are
prepared from whi ch each avenue of approach can be
covered. When the armor threat devel ops, the squad
moves by covered routes to the previ ousl y prepared
posi ti ons.
AT4 Sectors of Fire
Each assaul t squad i s assi gned sectors of fi re to
ensure that al l avenues of approach for armor vehi cl es
are covered and to provi de overl appi ng areas of
anti mechani zed responsi bi l i ty. The si ze of the sector
i s l i mi ted onl y by the avai l abl e observati on and fi el ds
of fi re. The assi gnment of a sector of fi re does not
precl ude fi ri ng at targets outsi de the sector. When the
squad i s used as a uni t, both assaul t teams are assi gned
the same sector. When the squad i s spl i t, the two teams
may be physi cal l y l ocated i n proxi mi ty but are
responsi bl e for separate sectors. Fi re pl anni ng shoul d
avoi d spl i tti ng assaul t squads unl ess absol utel y
necessary.
60-MM MORTAR TACTICAL
EMPLOYMENT
I n the defense, fi nal protecti ve fi re of a si ngl e
mortar covers an area of approxi matel y 50 by 50
meters. A FPF may be l ocated wi thi n 60 meters of the
FEBA. Thus the 60-mm mortar can cover smal l gaps
or dead space i n the machi ne gun FPF cl ose to the
FEBA. Fi ri ng posi ti ons for mortars shoul d be l ocated
between 150 and 300 meters to the rear of the FEBA.
4-16
Communications
Communi cati on to the mortar pl atoon starts at the
Fi re Di recti on Center (FDC). Compani es requesti ng
a fi re mi ssi on do so by contacti ng (FDC). The FDC
wi l l pl ot the fi re mi ssi on and i ssue fi re commands to
the mortar secti on l eader responsi bl e for the mortar
gun crew. Forward observers (FOs) assi gned to the
mortar pl atoon communi cate wi th the FDC di rectl y.
FDC must seek approval for al l fi re mi ssi ons from the
Fi re Support Coordi nator (FSC) l ocated i n the COC.
Sectors of Observation
Sectors of observati ons are cri ti cal for mortar fi re
to be effecti ve. The mortar pl atoon i s not assi gned a
sector of fi re but must be abl e to provi de coverage
throughout the battal i on securi ty area. Ri fl e pl atoon
commanders must ensure that thei r assi gned battl e
area i s covered by overl appi ng sectors of observati on.
Forward observers (FOs) from the mortar pl atoon are
usual l y assi gned thi s task, but i t may be necessary for
the ri fl e compani es to assi st the FOs. Personnel from
the ri fl e compani es assi gned as FOs must be abl e to
cal l i n a fi re mi ssi on and do so vi a the pl atoon
commander and the company CP.
Rate and Duration of Fire
I n the absence of any i nstructi ons, the normal rate
of fi re i s ni ne rounds per mi nute for the fi rst 2 mi nutes
and si x rounds per mi nute after that for the durati on of
fi nal pr otecti ve fi r e (FPF). The FDC chi ef wi l l
normal l y speci fy the number of rounds to be expended
on each target to the secti on l eader. The COC, upon
approval from the battal i on commander, sets the
number of rounds to be fi red for FPF. Consi derati on
i s gi ven to the ammuni ti on on hand, nonorgani c
support avai l abl e, anti ci pated resuppl y schedul e, area
to be covered, and enemy acti vi ty.
SUPPLEMENTARY MISSIONS
Both the machi ne gun squad and the assaul t squad
may be posi ti oned and empl oyed i n performi ng
suppl ementary mi ssi ons i n defense.
Machine Guns
Machi ne gun squads, empl oyed on the FEBA or
i n the reserve area, prepare suppl ementary posi ti ons
from whi ch to cover sectors of fi re different from
their primary sectors. Mi ssi ons are usual l y based
upon an enemy penetrati on of an adjaent company or
pl atoon and to provi de al l -around defense.
AT4
Assaul t squads, whose pri mary mi ssi ons are to cover
avenues of apprach to the FEBA, may be requi red to
prepare suppl ementary posi ti ons. The suppl ementary
posi ti ons are to cover avenues i nto the fl anks and rear of
the company. Assaul t squads support the defense by fi re
from pl anned suppl ementary posi ti ons when an armor
threat fai l s to devel op.
60-mm Mortars
Suppl ementar y posi ti ons ar e i nfr equentl y
establ i shed for a 60-mm mor tar squad secti on.
However, fi re wi thi n the battl e area i s pl anned to
provi de for supporti ng frontl i ne ri fl e uni ts when they
are forced to move to suppl ementary posi ti ons.
RANGE CARDS
Once a machi ne gun team i s depl oyed i n a
defensi ve posi ti on and the gun l ai d, the squad l eader
must ensure that range cards have been compl eted.
Two sets of range cards must be made for every
fi ghti ng posi ti on. Range cards are very i mportant and
are used for several purposes. The squad l eader
forwards one copy as soon as possi bl e to the pl atoon
commander. The pl atoon commander ensures the card
i s accurate and then forwards i t on to the company CP.
Range cards are the basi s for the fi re pl an of the
company. Al l supporti ng fi re, securi ty sectors, and
defensi ve coordi nati on are pl anned usi ng machi ne gun
fi re as the base from whi ch to bui l d.
The second copy of the range card wi l l be kept by
the gun team. The card i s used by members of the gun
team to fi re at predetermi ned targets or to hel p i n range
esti mati ons to other targets. Range cards may be
passed on to a rel i evi ng battal i on. Patrol s from
compani es or other uni ts may want to l ook at the range
cards to i denti fy fi nal protecti ve l i nes. Patrol s need to
know of any dead space to ensure that they are cl ear
of i nfi l trators and where to take cover duri ng an FPF.
COMPLETING A RANGE CARD
Range cards must be neat, cl ear, and prepared
usi ng a uni versal format. Observe the range card
symbol s and sampl e range card shown i n fi gures 4-17
and 4-18 as each component i s expl ai ned bel ow. (see
appendi x I I )
4-17
Figure 4-17.Range card symbols.
1. Identification Block: Thi s bl ock i denti fi es 4. Magnetic Orientation Line and Location
what gun the card was drawn for and on what date i t was
drawn. For securi ty reasons, the uni t shoul d onl y be
i denti fi ed to company l evel .
2. Weapon Symbol: The correct symbol for a
machi ne gun i s a si ngl e dot wi th a sol i d arrow extendi ng
out i n the di recti on of the FPL or PDF. The dot
represents the l ocati on of the gun. Record the magneti c
azi muth of the FPL or PDF al ong thi s l i ne.
3. Magnetic North Arrow: Thi s arrow i s drawn
from the dot that represents the gun posi ti on i n the
di recti on that represents North from the gun posi ti on i f
you were l ooki ng out toward your sector of fi re. The
correct symbol for North i s au arrow wi th a si ngl e barb.
Grid Coordinates: These are the two methods used so
that the CP, the battal i on, or other uni ts can posi ti vel y
l ocate a gun posi ti on. The magneti c ori entati on l i ne
method i s a l i ne drawn from a promi nent terrai n feature
that i s l ocated preferabl y behi nd fri endl y l i nes. It is a
single-solid line drawn from a prominent terrain
feature to the gun position with several arrow heads
pointing in the direction of the gun position; the
magnetic azimuth in roils from the prominent
terrain feature to the gun position is recorded on the
line.
NOTE: One degree i s equal to 17.7778 mi l s.
Exampl e: To convert an azi muth of 140 degrees,
4-18
Figure 4-18.Range card with an FPL.
si mpl y mul ti pl y 140 by 17.7778 whi ch equal s areas. Record the near and far l i mi ts of the dead space
2488.892. Round up to 2,489 mi l s.
The gri d coordi nates method i s where the gri d of
the gun posi ti on i s recorded next to the dot i n the
machi ne gun symbol . Onl y one of these two methods
to l ocate the posi ti on of the gun i s needed.
5. Sector Limits: Sector l i mi ts are drawn as
broken l i nes endi ng i n arrow heads. When you are
usi ng an FPL, onl y one sector l i mi t wi l l be drawn
because one i s l ocated i n the same l ocati on as the FPL.
6. Grazi ng Fi re: I f an FPL i s used, a
heavy-shaded area i s drawn al ong the i nsi de of the FPL,
whi ch wi l l show the l i mi ts of the grazi ng fi re. Show
any dead space by breaks i n the grazi ng fi re by shaded
i n meters or record the range next to the ends of the
shaded areas.
7. Terrain Features: Draw onl y those terrai n
features that si gni fi cantl y add to the cl ari ty of the range
card. I f a terrai n feature i s drawn, draw i t to the correct
perspecti ve.
8. Location of Friendly Troops/Equipment:
Draw i n any fri endl y posi ti ons or equi pment that i s
ei ther i n or near the sector l i mi ts of the machi ne gun.
Cl earl y l abel them wi th both a descri pti on, range, and
di recti on.
9. Targets: Draw targets to perspecti ve and l abel
them wi th a number. The number one target wi l l be
4-19
either the FPL or the left sector limit. If the FPL is on
the right sector limit, number all other targets
sequentially from right to left; at all other times, number
targets from left to right. There are two approved
methods for recording target data. One method is to
record data directly on the sketch along the line leading
to the target. Another method is to use a data block at
the bottom or reverse side of the range card.
Range Card for an FPL
The following scenario is to illustrate how a range
card is prepared for an FPL. Figure 4-19 provides an
illustration of a tactical field setting to help you.
Scenario
A machine gun fire team from the weapons
platoon is attached to the second platoon of Charlie
Company deployed along a low ridge overlooking a
narrow valley. The weapons platoon squad leader,
along with the other gun team, is supporting another
company. The creek bottom across the valley is
suspected of being a major infiltration route for the
enemy. On the second platoon s right limit is the first
platoon. Bravo Company joins the second platoon on
the left limit. The second platoon commander has
informed the machine gun team leader that the gun is
to be positioned on the left flank of the platoon. The
team leader informs the machine gun team to lay the
gun to be able to fire an FPF across the front of the
be the right sector limit. The trees at the bend in the
creek in front of the gun position is the left limit.
Interlocking fire for the FPF will be obtained from the
third squad gun team attached to the first platoon.
Using a compass or GPS, the gun team has located the
gun at grid coordinate 94576259. The grid is also 750
meters from the water tower that is located on a
magnetic back azimuth of 5,980 mils. The FPL lies
on a magnetic azimuth of 4,250 mils.
Figure 4-20 shows the beginning stages of the
range card. It shows the weapon symbol, the magnetic
North arrow, the magnetic orientation line and
location grid coordinates, the sector limits, and the
grazing fire.
Figure 4-21 shows the completed range card.
Details have been added, such as the unit identification
block, the terrain features, the location of friendly
troops or equipment, and the targets with their
individual data.
Range Card for a PDF
The range card for a PDF is very similar to an FPL
range card. The only real difference is the machine
gun symbol. A PDF does not align with a sector limit.
The following scenario is to illustrate how to
prepare a range card for a PDF. Figure 4-22 provides
ridge. The line formed by the base of the ridge is to an illustration of a tactical field setting.
Figure 4=19,-Panoramic view of tactical area.
4-20
Figure 4-20.Beginning of a range card.
Figure 4-21.Completed range card.
4-21
Figure 4-22.Panoramic view of tactical area.
Scenario
A machi ne gun fi re team has been attached to the
thi rd pl atoon of Al fa Company. The squad l eader and
another gun team have become casual ti es. The
pl atoon i s depl oyed i n a tree l i ne overl ooki ng a bri dge.
The enemy i s suspected to have i nfi l trated the vi l l age
on the other si de of the ri ver. The mi ssi on of the
pl atoon i s to stop any attempt from the enemy to cross
the ri ver vi a the bri dge. The fi rst pl atoon i s to the ri ght
of the thi rd pl atoon, and Bravo Company has joi ned
the thi rd pl atoon on the l eft. The commander of the
thi rd pl atoon has i nformed the machi ne gun team
l eader that the machi ne gun fi re team i s to be depl oyed
on the l eft fl ank of the pl atoon. The team l eader i s to
get the best angl e to fi re across the bri dge. The team
l eader i nforms the machi ne gun fi re team to l ay the
gun on a PDF centered on the bri dge. The l one tree
on the i mmedi ate ri ght i s the ri ght sector l i mi t, and the
l eftmost edge of the grove of trees across the ri ver i s
the l eft sector l i mi t. Usi ng a compass or GPS, the
machi ne gun fi re team has l ocated the gun at gri d
coordi nate 468262. The gri d i s al so 350 meters from
a road juncti on that i s l ocated on a magneti c back
azi muth of 5,420 mi l s. The PDF l i es on a magneti c
azi muth of 4,120 mi l s.
Fi gure 4-23 shows the begi nni ng stages of the
range card. I t shows the weapon symbol , the magneti c
North arrow, the magneti c ori entati on l i ne and
l ocati on gri d coordi nates, the sector l i mi ts, and the
PDF.
Fi gure 4-24 shows the compl eted range card.
Detai l s have been added, such as the uni t i denti fi cati on
bl ock, the terrai n features, the l ocati on of fri endl y
troops or equi pment, and the targets wi th thei r
i ndi vi dual data.
EXPEDIENT METHODS OF LAYING
FOR PREDETERMINED FIRE
Duri ng di fferent tacti cal si tuati ons, a T and E
mechani sm (refer to Seabee Combat Handbook,
Vol ume 1, for pr edeter mi ned fi r e) may not be
avai l abl e. Thi s may be due to the l ack of ei ther a T
and E mechani sm or a tri pod or a system i s needed
that i s more appl i cabl e to fi ri ng at ni ght. Whatever
the reason, the fol l owi ng methods can be just as
effecti ve:
1. Muzzle Stakes: Thi s method i s good for ni ght
fi ri ng. I t requi res no i l l umi nati on to l ay on a target and
can be used wi th or wi thout a T and E mechani sm. I t i s
most effecti ve when used wi th your gun mounted on a
tri pod. I t can be used from a bi pod mount i f a notched
stake i s used to stabi l i ze the rear of the weapon. Each
target i s desi gnated by dri vi ng a stake i nto the ground
under the muzzl e. Dri ve the stake i nto a posi ti on and
to a depth that wi l l resul t i n the gun bei ng correctl y
ai med when the muzzl e i s l owered di rectl y over the
stake (fi g. 4-25). The gun i s tri pod-mounted and wi l l
use swi ngi ng traverse fi re.
2. Notched Log under Muzzle: I nstead of usi ng
i ndi vi dual stakes, thi s method uses a l og or board under
the muzzl e. Thi s method i s al so used for ni ght fi re.
Notches are cut i nto the l og or board to the depth and
posi ti on requi red to fi re on each target. Thi s method i s
very l i mi ted i n depth, but i f the ground that i s fi red over
i s l evel or uni forml y sl opi ng, thi s may not be a probl em
(fi g. 4-26).
4-22
Figure 4.23.Beginning of a range card.
Figure 4-24.Completed range card.
4-23
Figure 4-25.Muzz1e stakes.
Figure 4-26.Notched log method.
3. Forked Stakes: Thi s i s a method that works
or fi nd natural l y forked stakes. The front of the gun i s
wel l wi th your gun supported by a bi ped onl y. To use
supported by the bi ped, and the rear i s supported by the
thi s method, make a set of stakes wi th notches i n the top
forked stakes. I t i s essenti al that a set of U-shaped pi ts
4-24
Figure 4-27.Forked stake method.
are dug under the feet of the bi pod to rotate i n. I f the
feet of the bi pod move about freel y wi thout bei ng
contai ned i n these pi ts, the accuracy of the fi re wi l l be
reduced (fi g. 4-27).
4. Notched Log under Receiver: Thi s method
works si mi l ar i n pri nci pl e to the fork method. I nstead
of havi ng notched stakes for each target, a l og i s
substi tuted under the recei ver wi th notches cut to the
correct depth and i n the correct spot for di recti on. The
bi ggest drawback here i s the l i mi ted depth of target you
can engage; however, i f the ground i s l evel and
uni forml y sl oped, thi s may not be a factor (fi g. 4-28).
5. Aiming Stakes and Tape: Thi s method i s
uni que because i t i s the onl y method that does not
restri ct the free movement of the gun. Al though i t i s
more accurate than most others, i t al so consumes the
most ti me and requi res the use of some materi al that wi l l
not al ways be avai l abl e. To use thi s method, you must
mount the gun on a tri pod and have the T and E
mechani sm i n pl ace. To i mpl ement thi s method, you
wi l l need l umi nous tape and one stake for each target
and each sector. Fi gures 4-29 and 4-30 show thi s
method wi th an M19.
COMPANY FIRE PLAN
Al l the pl atoon commanders submi tted thei r fi re
pl ans to the company CP. The company CP compi l es
the i nformati on and prepares a company fi re pl an.
I tems that must be i ncl uded on the company fi re pl an
Each pri mary and secondary posi ti on of the
pl atoon
Each sector of fi re of the pl atoon
Posi ti on and PDF for each automati c ri fl e
Locati on of the pl atoon or the company
observati on post
Locati on of the pl atoon or the company l i steni ng
post
Locati on of the forward observer (FO)
FPLs of al l weapons l ocated i n each defense area
of the pl atoon
On-cal l targets
Barri ers and earl y warni ng devi ces
Cl aymore mi nes
4-25
Figure 4-28.Notched log under receiver.
Figure 4-29.Base stake technique.
4-26
HORIZONTAL LOG OR BOARD
USED WITH THE TRIPOD-
MOUNTED MKW MACHINE GUN
SECTOR LlMlT
Figure 4930.~Aiming stakes used with a log.
l Layout of barbed-wire entanglements
0 Patrol routes
l Evacuation routes
The company CP will submit the fire plan to the
COC. The COC compiles the information and
prepares a battalion fire plan similar to the items
required in a company fire plan.
S-Y
Planning and development of defensive tactics
take a lot of time and coordination. All company
commanders, platoon commanders, and squad leaders
must be involved. Communication between them is
essential for developing defensive tactics. A
well-thought-out defensive plan will surely be an
asset.
Know the enemy, know yo,urself; your victory
will never be endangered. Know the ground, know the
weather; your victory will then be total. Sun Tzu
(500 B.C.)
4-27
CHAPTER 5
COUNTER AMBUSH TECHNIQUES
Seabees spend a considerable amount of time
convoying from the bivouac area to project sites. This
makes it important for you to know and understand
proper convoy procedures. COMSECONDNCB/
COMTHIRDNCBINST. 3 122.1 provides the guidance
you need for convoy procedures. Another good
source for convoy procedures is the FMFM 4-9, Motor
Transport. This chapter will focus on techniques for
use in counter ambush operations that supplement
established tactical procedures. It includes counter
ambush preparations for motorized units and
immediate action drills.
COUNTER AMBUSH TECHNIQUES
FOR CONVOYS
Experience in fighting terrorists and guerrillas has
shown that they favor the ambush anytime a favorable
situation exists. The ambush of units traveling in a
motor convoy is not difficult and can be very costly if
you do not take time to prepare vehicles and occupants
before contact.
CHARACTERISTICS OF
A vEHICUI.diR AMBUSH
A convoy is never safe from a guerrilla ambush.
There is no set pattern for a likely area for an ambush.
Ravines, defiles, and heavily wooded or
jungle-covered areas are most favorable but ambushes
are equally likely to be conducted in villages or in flat
terrain that offers a minimum of cover and
concealment. The most common characteristics of an
ambush are as follows:
1. The ambush lasts the minimum time necessary
to accomplish the mission.
2. The ambush occurs in two phases-a short
period of heavy fire followed by an assault of the
ambushed vehicles to capture equipment, to complete
the annihilation of personnel, and to destroy vehicles.
3. The basic ambush weapons are small arms.
These are augmented by machine guns, rocket
launchers, and recoilless rifles.
4. The enemy will use electrically detonated mines
to disable vehicles and cause personnel casualties.
These mines may consist of artillery shells and mortar
rounds as well as conventional mines.
PREPARATION OF VEHICLES
Occupants traveling in vehicles must have
all-around observation and fields of fire and can throw
or fire grenades without hindrance. They must be able
to exit from the vehicle rapidly with minimum
restriction. For these reasons the configuration of
vehicles, such as a 6 by 6 cargo truck, must be altered.
The following measures are taken to harden a
vehicle and provide its occupants with a degree of
protection:
1. Canvas, bows, windshields, and doors are
removed.
2. The tailgate is lowered to a horizontal position.
A piece of pipe, wood, or metal is affixed to the vehicle
in a vertical position extending above the driver s head.
This will prevent decapitation from wire stretched
across the road.
3. Sandbags are placed on the floorboards and bed
of the vehicle. For a 6 by 6 truck, a single row of
sandbags is placed on the bed of the truck. Then
sandbags are stacked five layers high down each side of
the truck. This provides protection from most small
arms. A total of 70 to 100 sandbags is required for each
truck This load plus troops and equipment weight
permits off-highway operation without undue wear on
the vehicle. A wooden bench or packs rigged down the
middle of the bed provide the troops with seats (fig.
5-l.)
4. Sections of scrap armor plate may be used to
reinforce sandbags in the bed of the vehicle.
ORGANIZATION OF OCCUPANTS
Encounters with a guerrilla ambush are sudden,
short, and unexpected. The opportunity to inflict
casualties upon the guerrillas is lost if your troops are
not organized and well-drilled to take immediate
5-l
Figure 5-1.Hardened vehicle.
offensi ve acti on. The organi zati on of a ri fl e squad as
occupants of a 6 by 6 truck i s as fol l ows:
1. A vehi cl e commander i s desi gnated for each
vehi cl e. The squad l eader i s usual l y the vehi cl e commander
and i s posi ti oned i n the bed of the vehi cl e where he or she
can best control the squad and operator of the vehi cl e.
2. An assi stant dri ver (shotgun ri der) capabl e of
operati ng the vehi cl e i s seated i n the cabi n wi th the
dri ver. The shotgun ri der i s armed wi th a M-203
grenade l auncher wi th the M-16 as a automati c ri fl e.
After debarkati on, the shotgun ri der remai ns wi th the
vehi cl e to act as cl ose protecti on for the dri ver and
vehi cl e. He or she does not accompany maneuvers
executed by the occupant squad.
3. Four comer sentri es are posi ti oned i n the bed of
the vehi cl e. The two at the front observe an arc of 90
degrees from the front to each si de. The two at the back
observe an arc of 90 degrees from the back to each si de.
When possi bl e, each sentry i s armed wi th an automati c
ri fl e. I f the vehi cl e i s ambushed, the sentri es fi re
i mmedi atel y from thei r posi ti ons wi thi n the vehi cl e.
Thei r fi re covers the debarkati on of the occupants i f the
vehi cl e i s hal ted i n the ambush ki l l i ng area. They al so
hel p the vehi cl e commander by noti fyi ng the
commander of any convoy formati on.
4. I f a machi ne gun team i s travel i ng wi th the
occupant squad, i t shoul d be posi ti oned faci ng out the
r ear of the vehi cl e and be pr epar ed to debar k
expedi ti ousl y, bri ngi ng fi re to bear on the enemy and
coveri ng the debarkati on of the four corner sentri es.
5. The remai ni ng occupants are posi ti oned i n the
bed of the vehi cl e, each faci ng outboard.
6. The maxi mum number of peopl e i n the bed of a
hardened 6 by 6 truck shoul d not exceed 13 (fi g. 5-2).
CONVOY COMMANDER
The posi ti on of the convoy commander i s where
he or she can best control the convoy. Thi s posi ti on
shoul d never be the l ead vehi cl e. A second i n
command and a vehi cl e commander for each vehi cl e
are desi gnated by the convoy commander. Bri efi ng by
the convoy commander before departure i s detai l ed
and expl i ci t. Al l dri vers and vehi cl e commanders are
present. The bri efi ng i ncl udes the fol l owi ng:
Formati on (cl ose col umn, open col umn, or
i nfi l trati on)
Ti mi ngs
Route
Speed
Order of march (organi zati on of vehi cl es and
vehi cl es i nterval s)
Communi cati on (r adi o fr equenci es, hor n
si gnal s, and arm si gnal s)
NOTE: Fi gure 5-3 shows recommended arm
si gnal s. I t i s i mportant that each member of the
Figure 5-2.Organization of occupants in a hardened 6 x 6
truck.
5-2
Figure 5-3.Convoy arm signals.
5-3
convoy know what the arm si gnal s mean no matter
whi ch arm si gnal s are used.
Procedure when communi cati on i s l ost
Acti on on vehi cl e breakdown
Acti ons on ambush
Acti on i n danger areas
Cal l for fi re procedures
Check poi nts
Locati on of fri endl y forces
AMBUSH DEFENSE AND ACTION ON
CONTACT
Whatever the precauti ons and preparati ons, the
ambush i s nearl y al ways an unexpected encounter.
Counter ambush dri l l s are si mpl e courses of acti on
desi gned to deal wi th the probl em of the unexpected
encounter. They cal l for i mmedi ate, posi ti ve, and
offensi ve acti on. The acti on on ambush i s to dri ve
through the ambush area or stop before runni ng i nto
i t, then to attack the enemy i mmedi atel y from the fl ank
or the rear. When vehi cl es are fi red upon, the
fol l owi ng acti ons are taken:
1. Dri vers attempt to dri ve through the ki l l i ng
zone.
2. Personnel return fi re i mmedi atel y.
3. When vehi cl es are cl ear of the ki l l i ng zone, they
are hal ted. Occupants di smount and take i mmedi ate
offensi ve acti on agai nst the enemy posi ti ons.
4. Subsequent vehi cl es approachi ng the ki l l i ng
zone hal t short of the zone. Occupants debark and take
i mmedi ate offensi ve acti on agai nst the enemy
posi ti ons.
I f hardened vehi cl es are forced to hal t i n the
ki l l i ng zone, al l avai l abl e weapons are used to return
fi re i mmedi atel y. Occupants remai n i n the vehi cl e. On
the fi r st per cepti bl e sl ackeni ng of enemy fi r e,
occupants di smount. When ri di ng i n a soft vehi cl e
and caught i n a ki l l i ng zone, occupants di smount
i mmedi atel y. I n both cases, occupants di smount
under the coveri ng fi res of the four corner sentri es,
who i ni ti al l y remai n aboard. The occupants then
depl oy to the si de di rected by the vehi cl e commander
and take the enemy under fi re to cover the di smount
of the four sentri es.
After di smounti ng, i f no cover i s avai l abl e, an
i mmedi ate frontal assaul t agai nst the enemy i s
empl oyed. The most l ogi cal course of acti on after
di smounti ng i s to take cover, i mmedi atel y establ i sh a
base of fi re, and use a maneuver el ement agai nst the
enemy ambush posi ti ons. Speed of executi on i s
cri ti cal .
COUNTERACTION TACTICAL
CONSIDERATIONS
The most effecti ve counteracti on to ambushes i s a
fl anki ng attack by el ements not i n the ki l l i ng zone
qui ckl y fol l owed by rel entl ess pursui t of the enemy.
Attenti on must be gi ven to the fol l owi ng tacti cal
consi der ati ons:
1. I n acti ons when no troops have entered the
ki l l i ng zone, the convoy commander l aunches an
i mmedi ate fl anki ng attack on the enemy posi ti on, usi ng
supporti ng fi res from machi ne guns and mortars.
2. Fi re i n the ki l l i ng zone may be from onl y one
si de of the road wi th a smal l hol di ng force on the
opposi te si de. To contai n the convoy el ement i n the
ki l l i ng zone, the enemy wi l l pl ace mi nes and booby
traps on the hol di ng force si de. Take care when
assaul ti ng the mai n ambush force because mi nes are
commonl y used to protect i ts fl anks.
3. I n acti ons where some porti ons of the vehi cl es
are ahead and out of the ki l l i ng zone and the remai nder
are hal ted short of the zone, the porti on that has not yet
entered the ki l l i ng zone i ni ti ates the fl anki ng attack. I f
the convoy commander i s not pressent, the seni or vehi cl e
commander takes command and di rects the attack.
Troops i n vehi cl es whi ch are ahead of the ki l l i ng zone
di smount. Under the command of the seni or vehi cl e
commander, the troops return to the vi ci ni ty of the
ki l l i ng zone and expl oi t the si tuati on.
4. The best way an armored vehi cl e can hel p i n
counter ambush acti on i s by movi ng i nto the ki l l i ng
zone to engage the enemy at short range. I n thi s way i t
can gi ve good coveri ng fi re to the fl anki ng attack or
provi de protecti on for those troops caught i n the ki l l i ng
zone.
I t i s possi bl e that the convoy commander may be
ki l l ed, wounded, caught i n the ki l l i ng zone, or
posi ti oned on the wrong si de of the zone. I t i s
essenti al that al l vehi cl e commanders and squad
l eaders know thei r responsi bi l i ti es for organi zi ng and
di recti ng a counter ambush acti on. Thi s i s cl earl y
stated i n uni t convoy orders and emphasi zed at
br i efi ngs. The techni ques outl i ned above ar e
practi ced repeatedl y unti l the reacti on procedures
5-4
become a predrille
and positi .ve action
d re sponse, permitting immediate
on ambush
AMBUSH DEFENSE FOR AN
UNBLOCKED ROAD
Guerrillas are seldom able to contain an entire
convoy in a single killing zone. This is because of the
extensive road space occupied by even a platoon size
convoy, and because security or lack of available
forces may limit the size of the ambushing force.
More frequently, a part of a convoy, either head, tail,
or a section of the main body, is ambushed.
That part of a convoy that is in the killing zone and
receiving fire must drive out of the ambush if the road
to the front is open. Vehicles disabled by enemy fire
are left behind or, if blocking the road, are pushed out
of the way by following vehicles. Armored escort
vehicles must not block convoy vehicles by halting in
the traveled portion of the road to return fire. Vehicles
that have not entered the killing zone must not attempt
to do so. They should stop and personnel should
dismount and take defensive positions. Elements of
the convoy should not fire on suspected enemy
positions without coordinating with the escort forces.
The escort vehicles may have left the road in an
attempt to overrun hostile positions. Other actions
available to convoy personnel for the neutralization of
the ambush force are as follows:
1. Direct any vehicles mounted with weapons to
lay down a heavy volume of fire on the ambush force.
2. Call for artillery fire on enemy positions.
3. Call for close air support on enemy positions.
4. Call for reaction forces.
5. Direct all nondriving personnel to place a heavy
volume of fire on enemy forces as rapidly as possible,
as vehicles move out of the killing zone.
A motor transport convoy with a limited escort is
seldom able to defeat a hostile force and should not
attempt to do so. When part of the convoy is isolated
in the killing zone, vehicles that have not entered the
ambush area should turn around and return to the
nearest secured area until supporting forces can clear
the ambush.
AMBUSH DEFENSE FOR A
BLOCKED ROAD
When an element of a convoy is halted in the
killing zone and is unable to proceed due to disabled
vehicles, a damaged bridge, or other obstacles,
personnel will dismount, take cover, and return a
maximum volume of fire on enemy positions.
Security troops from vehicles that have passed
through the ambush area dismount and prepare to
attack the flanks of the ambush position. Leave a
security force behind to protect these vehicles.
Personnel in vehicles that have not entered the killing
zone follow the same procedure. Before attempting to
flank the ambush force, the convoy commander
should ensure that the force will not be in the vicinity
of any fire missions. w
When a security escort is provided and a combat
emergency arises, the convoy commander retains
operational control unless the command responsibility
has previously been assumed by the area commander
in whose zone the convoy is operating. Normally, the
security force will take action to neutralize the
ambush while the convoy escapes from the killing
zone.
If immediate air or artillery support is available,
personnel will be restricted to a specified distance
from the road to avoid casualties from friendly fire. In
this situation, personnel in the killing zone establish a
base of fire, while others take up defensive positions
around their vehicles. Everyone waits while
supporting fire is called in on the enemy positions.
When the enemy is defeated or has retreated, the
road must be cleared and convoy movement resumed
as soon as possible. Wounded personnel are
evacuated, usually by helicopter. When disabled
vehicles cannot be towed, their cargo is distributed
among other vehicles if time permits. When it is not
feasible to evacuate vehicles and/or cargo, they will
be destroyed upon order from the convoy commander.
When possible, radios and other critical items will be
recovered before the vehicles are destroyed. Under no
circumstances Will anything in the convoy be allowed
to fall into enemy hands.
CONVOY DEFENSE, MINES, AND
BOOBY TRAPS
Mines and booby traps are frequently used by
ambush forces. Command-detonated mines are often
used to start an ambush. Mines will also be planted
along the shoulder of the road. This is for harassment
and interdiction. A booby trap system may be used
against personnel in vehicles. They could consist of
hand grenades attached to tree branches over the road
where antennas or other projections from vehicles will
5-5
snag and detonate the grenades. Claymore mines may
be suspended from trees and command detonated
when a vehicle passes. The following guidelines have
proved effective in decreasing damage by mines in
convoy operations:
1. Prescribe alarm signals.
for immediate action to take 2. Give instructions
when under attack.
3. Prescribe actions to take in the absence of
1. Follow the tracks of the vehicle in front.
2. Avoid driving on the shoulder of the road.
3. Whenever possible, do not
objects, brush, or grass in the road.
4. Avoid fresh earth in the road.
run over foreign
5. Watch local national traffic and the reactions of
people on foot. (They will frequently give away the
location of any mines or booby traps.)
4. Make sure that defense procedures are
rehearsed.
5
before
Review the procedures
the convoy moves out.
with convoy personnel
The convoy commander must remember that
enemy pilots may do the following:
1. Tries to surprise the convoy.
6. Heavy vehicles, such as tanks, are useful in
exploding small mines when deployed in front of the
convoy.
2. If aircraft attack from higher than 350 meters,
small-arms fire will not have much of a chance
against them but air defense weapons can be used
against them.
7. Wear protective equipment (protective helmets
and armored vests).
CONVOY DEFENSE FOR SNIPER FIRE
3. Will fly at high speed, using high-G maneuvers
and evasive action to make air defense weapons and
small-arms fire less effective.
Exercise caution when sniper fire is received to
ensure that any return fire does not harm friendly
troops or civilians in the area. The best action to take
is passive, and you should ensure that all personnel
wear protective helmets and armored vests. All
vehicles should move through the area without
stopping. Escort personnel must notify the march
element commander by giving a prearranged signal,
such as a smoke grenade, thrown in the direction of
fire. Any attempt to locate and destroy the sniper must
be long-range fire. The convoy commander may order
additional fire or supporting forces into the area to
destroy, capture, or drive off the sniper. Convoy
Lookout Procedures
Air guard duties are assigned to each individual
throughout the convoy, and each person is given
specific search areas (scanning patterns). As much as
vehicle configuration will allow, search areas assigned
should cover a full 360 degrees in overlapping sectors.
If the road march lasts more than an hour, Seabees
should take turns at air guard duty. Scanning for a long
period (over 30 minutes) dulls the ability to spot
aircraft.
Camouflage and Concealment
personnel should be aware that a heavy volume of fire
is frequently used by the enemy to slow down a
convoy before an ambush.
CONVOY DEFENSE AGAINST
AN AIR ATTACK
The air threat varies from armed helicopters to
high-performance aircraft. Convoys face the greatest
danger of an air attack while moving along open roads
and during halts where there is no overhead cover. An
air attack is a type of ambush; therefore, many
procedures used during a ground ambush are also
applicable to the air attack. For example, the convoy
commander must do the following:
Camouflage and concealment techniques are used
to make it more difficult for the enemy to spot the
convoy. Not much can be done to change the shape of
a vehicle moving down the road, but the type of cargo
being transported can be disguised or conceded by
covering it with a tarpaulin. Bulk fuel transporters
(tankers/refuelers) are usually priority targets. By
rigging tarps and bows over the cargo compartment,
you can conceal the nature of the cargo from the
enemy pilot. Other effective cover and concealment
measures are as follows:
1. Operators must be trained to break the shape of
the vehicle as seen from the air by looking for a bush, a
tree, or other means of concealment as they disperse.
I
5-6
2. Smooth surfaces and objects (wi ndshi el ds,
headl i ghts, and mi rror) wi l l refl ect l i ght and attract the
attenti on of the pi l ot. Al l shi ny i tems shoul d be
camoufl aged or covered before the convoy moves out
(fi g. 5-4).
I f vehi cl es are not pai nted i n a pattern to bl end
wi th the terrai n and to break the outl i ne, you can use
mud to achi eve thi s effect.
Communications Security
Communi cati ons equi pment can be very useful
for control l i ng convoys. But i t can al so hel p enemy
pi l ots fi nd you. Use the radi o when necessary, but be
bri ef.
ACTIVE DEFENSE AGAINST
AIRCRAFT
The convoy commander may choose between an
acti ve and a passi ve defense agai nst the ai r threat. I n
an acti ve defense, the amount of fi re a l ogi sti c convoy
can bri ng to bear on attacki ng ai rcraft i s usual l y
l i mi ted. I t i s l i mi ted to the number of vehi cl es wi th
mounted machi ne guns and the i ndi vi dual weapons of
vehi cl e operators and assi stant operators. However,
convoy personnel shoul d not be l ed to thi nk that tryi ng
to shoot down an attacki ng ai rpl ane wi th smal l -arms
weapons i s frui tl ess. I n the Korean confl i ct, the U.S.
Ai r Force l ost 544 ai rcraft to combi ned smal l -arms
and ai r defense fi re. Over North Vi etnam, smal l arms
contri buted to si gni fi cant l osses of U.S. ai rcraft.
Duri ng the Mi ddl e East War i n 1973, uni ts on both
si des used smal l -arms weapons to dri ve off, damage,
or destroy attacki ng ai rcraft.
NOTE: The key to effecti ve smal l -arms fi re
agai nst ai rcraft i s vol ume. Put up a l arge vol ume of
fi re wi th smal l cal i ber weapons. Accuracy i s not
i mportant; vol ume i s!
Figure 5-4.Cover portions of vehicles that reflect light.
Firing Positions for Small
Arms against Aircraft
Except for the prone fi ri ng posi ti on, the basi c
fi ri ng stances of the ri fl eman remai n the same. A
ri fl eman qui ckl y l earns that he or she wants to fi re
from some type of cover or conceal ment; therefore,
you shoul d l ook for a tree or a l arge rock to hel p
support the weapon and provi de some protecti on.
The M-60 machi ne gunner shoul d al so fi re from a
protected posi ti on i f possi bl e. I n a real emergency,
another Seabee can act as a hasty fi ri ng support for the
machi ne guns. The M-2 .50 cal i ber machi ne gun can
onl y be used from the ri ng mount of dedi cated
vehi cl es. The fol l owi ng are ti ps for Smal l -Arms Ai r
Defense:
1. Fi re at any attacki ng ai rcraft usi ng al l avai l abl e
weapons.
2. Fi re at the nose of an ai rcraft.
3. Vol ume of fi re i s the key; everybody fi res.
4. Lead ai rcraft crossi ng your posi ti on (M-16,
M-60, and M-2 shoul d l ead jets by the l ength of one
footbal l fi el d).
5. Take cover i f you have ti me.
6. Support your weapon, i f possi bl e.
7. Li e on your back i f caught i n the open so you
can fi re upon the ai rcraft.
8. Mounted M-60s and M-2s shoul d ai m sl i ghtl y
above the nose of the ai rcraft for head-on targets.
Passive Measures
For a l ogi sti c convoy wi thout si gni fi cant
fi repower, passi ve measures are most effecti ve. The
key here i s to prevent attacks by hosti l e ai rcraft.
Di spersi on i s the key for ai r defense. The formati on
used by the convoy i s a type of passi ve defense. The
convoy commander must deci de whether to use an
open, cl osed, or i nfi l tr ati on col umn. Di stance
between vehi cl es must be fl exi bl e. I t shoul d vary
from ti me to ti me duri ng a march. Factors i nfl uenci ng
sel ecti on of the best vehi cl e di stance i ncl ude the
fol l owi ng:
Mi ssi on
Cover and conceal ment al ong the route
Length of the road march
Type of road surface
5-7
Types of vehi cl es route markers are needed. The cl ose col umn i s
Nature of cargo
general l y used at ni ght because ai r attack threats are l ess
l i kel y. I t i s al so used over poorl y marked routes when
Enemy threat (ground or ai r)
vi sual contact between vehi cl es i s essenti al and i n areas
Presence of defense support
where hosti l e acti on i s not i mmi nent. Seabees found
Smal l -arms potenti al
thi s formati on to be a success i n crowds duri ng
Operati on Restore Hope i n Somal i a, Afri ca. The cl ose
The fol l owi ng are types of formati on a convoy
commander may choose for passi ve ai r defense:
1. Close Column. Each vehi cl e fol l ows the
vehi cl e ahead at a di stance suffi ci ent to ensure agai nst
col l i si on. The gap speci fi ed i s dependent upon road
condi ti ons, weather condi ti ons, terrai n, and convoy
securi ty requi rements. Cl ose col umn formati on eases
col umn control and i ntracol umn communi cati ons.
Duri ng dayl i ght hours, fewer gui des, traffi c escorts, and
col umn prevented crowds from comi ng between the
convoy and di srupti ng the movement of the convoy.
2. Open Column. I n open col umn formati ons
di stances between vehi cl es are i ncreased to enhance
di spersi on. Thi s formati on offers an advantage i n that
fewer vehi cl es ar e l i kel y to be damaged fr om
ai r-del i vered rockets, cannons, or cl uster bomb uni ts.
An open col umn i ncreases the degree of passi ve
protecti on agai nst hosti l e observati on and attack. I t
TYPE WHEN DENSI TY SPEED ADVANTAGES DI SADVANTAGES
FORMATI ON USED PER MI LE/KM mi /h/km/h
Cl ose Ni gh t, poor l y 67/40 10/16 Ful l traffi c capaci ty of road Qui ck di sper si on i s
marked routes, or can be used. Control i s di ffi cul t. The col umn i s
i n congested areas. better. Fewer gui des, easi l y detected. May cause
escorts, and route markers congesti on at poi nt of
are needed. ar r i val . Requi r es car eful
schedul i ng and control to
avoi d bl ock i n g a t
i nter secti ons. Causes
dri ver fati gue.
Open Dayl i ght 20/12 15/24 Less chance of enemy Command and control are
observati on or attack. di ffi cul t. Proper vehi cl e
Cargo moves faster. Dri ver spaci ng i s hard to keep.
fati gue i s reduced. Fewer
acci dents, very fl exi bl e.
I nfi l trati on Dayl i ght, con- 10 or l ess per Var i ous Provi des maxi mum More ti me requi red to
ges ted ar eas . hour securi ty and decepti on. compl ete the move.
Heav y tr affi c Hi gh speeds are possi bl e. Col umn contr ol i s near l y
crosses route. Other traffi c has l i ttl e i mpossi bl e. Dri vers can
effect on i ndi vi dual trucks. get l ost. Speci fi c detai l s
Does not hi nder cross must be provi ded each
traffi c. d r i ver . Mai ntenance,
r efuel i ng, and messi ng ar e
di ffi cul t to arrange.
Vehi cl es may bunch up,
causi ng cl ose col umns to
form. Requi res experi enced
dri vers. Orders are not
easi l y changed.
The uni t cannot be
redepl oyed as a uni t unti l
the l ast vehi cl e arri ves at
desti nati on.
Figure 5-5.Types of column formation.
5-8
permi ts greater hi ghway speeds wi th safety and
pr ovi des for gr eater fl exi bi l i ty i n hi ghway use.
However, open col umns make control more di ffi cul t for
the convoy commander when i t i s necessary to gi ve
orders to stop, to conti nue, to di sperse and seek
conceal ment, or to engage ai rcraft. Moreover, the
col umn i s more l i kel y to be attacked si nce i t i s exposed
for a l onger peri od of ti me. I f attacked, i ts defense i s
l ess effecti ve because smal l -ar ms fi r e i s l ess
concentrated.
3. I nfiltration. I n i nfi l tr ati on for mati ons,
vehi cl es are di spatched as fol l ows:
a. I ndi vi dual l y
b. I n smal l groups
c. At i rregul ar i nterval s
d At a rate that mi ni mi zes changes i n the
average traffi c densi ty and prevents massi ng of vehi cl es
Average di stance between vehi cl es and groups i s
deci ded by the rate at whi ch vehi cl es are di spatched.
Decepti on i s provi ded by i ntermi ngl i ng vari ous types
of vehi cl es and by permi tti ng passi ng wi thi n the
col umn. I nfi l trati on may provi de the best passi ve
defense agai nst hosti l e obser vati on and attack;
however, i t provi des the l east acti ve defense capabi l i ty
i f i ndi vi dual or smal l groups of vehi cl es are attacked.
Thi s method permi ts i ndi vi dual vehi cl es to travel at
hi gh speeds and cause l ess cross traffi c i nterference.
I t permi ts use of a route on whi ch heavy traffi c
normal l y precl udes the enti re uni t movi ng at one ti me
(fi g. 5-5).
PASSIVE REACTIONS TO
AIR ATTACKS
Seei ng the enemy fi rst has l ong been establ i shed
as an el ement of survi val i n any combat si tuati on. The
advantages of seei ng enemy ai rcraft fi rst i s l argel y
s el f-ev i den t, an d th e i mpor tan ce can n ot be
overemphasi zed. Al l convoy personnel must be
thoroughl y bri efed as to thei r responsi bi l i ti es i n the
empl oyment of effecti ve scanni ng techni ques. When
ai rcraft are spotted or earl y warni ng i s recei ved, the
convoy commander has three opti ons:
Conti nue to march.
Have the convoy i mmedi atel y stop i n pl ace.
Di sperse qui ckl y to conceal ed posi ti ons.
Continue to March
The mi ssi on and/or terrai n may di ctate that the
march conti nue. I f thi s i s the case, the convoy speed
shoul d be i ncreased. Conti nui ng the march offers the
advantage of preventi ng a movi ng target and maki ng
i t more di ffi cul t for the enemy to hi t. Di sadvantages
exi st i n that detecti on i s easi er and vol ume and densi ty
of smal l -arms fi re are reduced.
Stop the Convoy
I f the convoy commander chooses to hal t the
convoy, the vehi cl es si mpl y pul l to the shoul ders of
the road. Thi s techni que has several advantages:
1. Harder for the pi l ot to see the convoy.
2. Easy to conti nue the march.
3. Vol ume and densi ty of organi c weapons wi l l be
greater than i f the convoy di sperses.
However, a di sadvantage exi sts i n that a convoy
stopped on the open road makes a good target for
enemy troops. The enemy has a better chance of
causi ng seri ous damage.
Disperse the Convoy
A si mpl e techni que that a convoy commander can
use i n di spersi ng vehi cl es i s to establ i sh a method i n
Standard Operati ng Procedures (SOPs). SOPs wi l l
emphasi ze that i n case of an ai r attack odd-numbered
vehi cl es go to the l eft, and even-numbered vehi cl es go
to the ri ght. The key to di spersi on i s not to make two
strai ght l i nes out of what was one l ong l i ne; the
vehi cl es must be staggered. Thi s shoul d not be a
probl em i f the dri vers have been trai ned to go to trees,
bushes, and fol ds i n the gr ound that wi l l gi ve
conceal ment (fi g. 5-6).
Once the convoy i s di spersed, al l personnel ,
except vehi cul ar mounted weapons gunners, di smount
and take up fi ri ng posi ti ons. Advantages of thi s
system are that i t i s more di ffi cul t for the enemy pi l ot
Figure 5-6.Vehicles dispersed and in concealed positions.
5-9
to detect the vehi cl es and get mul ti pl e hi ts. However,
thi s method has several di sadvantages:
1. Easi er for the enemy pi l ot to spot the convoy as
i t begi ns to di sperse.
2. Vol ume and densi ty of smal l -arms fi re are
reduced.
3. Takes l onger to reorgani ze the convoy after the
attack.
ARTILLERY OR INDIRECT FIRE
Enemy arti l l ery uni ts or i ndi rect fi re weapons may
be used to destroy l ogi sti c convoys or to harass and
i nterdi ct the forward movement of suppl i es and
personnel . Arti l l ery fi res are ei ther prepl anned fi re or
fi res cal l ed i n and adjusted on a target of opportuni ty
by a forward observer. Of the two, the adjusted fi res
present the more compl ex probl em as the arti l l ery
barrages can be adjusted to fol l ow the acti ons of the
convoy.
Active Defense
Acti ve defensi ve measures agai nst
l i mi ted but must not be overl ooked. I t
arti l l ery are
i s i mportant
that several personnel are hi ghl y capabl e of cal l i ng i n
a fi re mi ssi on. Acti ve measures woul d i ncl ude the
fol l owi ng:
1. Di recti ng counterbattery fi re i f the di recti on and
approxi mate di stance to the enemy arti l l ery can be
esti mated.
2. Di recti ng smal l -arms fi re or arti l l ery fi res
agai nst the enemy forward observer i f they can be
l ocated.
3. Coordi nati ng ai r stri kes agai nst the enemy
arti l l ery.
Passive Defense
The convoy commander has three passi ve defense
opti ons when confronted wi th i ncomi ng arti l l ery
rounds. The opti ons are as fol l ows:
l Hal t i n pl ace.
l Conti nue to march.
l Di sperse qui ckl y to conceal ed posi ti ons.
Regardl ess of the opti on sel ected, the acti ons to be
taken and the si gnal di recti ng the acti on shoul d be
covered i n the uni t SOP.
The convoy shoul d onl y be hal ted when the
arti l l ery concentrati on i s ahead of the convoy. The
convoy commander shoul d l ook for an al ternate route
around the i mpact area and the convoy shoul d remai n
prepared to move out rapi dl y.
The mi ssi ons and/or terrai n may requi re the
convoy to conti nue. I f thi s i s the case, i ncrease speed
and spread out to the maxi mum extent the terrai n wi l l
al l ow. Casual ti es can be reduced by the fol l owi ng:
Avoi di ng the i mpact area
I ncreasi ng speed
I ncreasi ng di spersi on
Weari ng i ndi vi dual protecti ve equi pment
Usi ng the vehi cl e for protecti on
IMMEDIATE ACTION DRILLS
The guer r i l l a nor mal l y seeks contact wi th
or gani zed uni ts onl y under favor abl e tacti cal
ci rcumstances; for exampl e, ambushes. When contact
i s made under l ess favorabl e ci rcumstances, the
guerri l l a attempts a rapi d wi thdrawal . I n ei ther case,
smal l -uni t encounters wi th guerri l l as are l i kel y to be
sudden, vi ol ent, and of short durati on. Sl ow reacti ons
to an ambush can resul t i n excessi ve l osses or the l oss
of an opportuni ty to puni sh the guerri l l a uni t. Contact
i s often made at cl ose range, parti cul arl y when
operati ng i n jungl e, temperate zone forests, woods, or
heavy brush. I mmedi ate acti on dri l l s ai d smal l uni ts
i n reacti ng qui ckl y and properl y.
I mmedi ate acti on dr i l l s ar e pr edr i l l ed,
prerehearsed reacti ons to contact or anti ci pated
contact wi th the enemy. I mmedi ate acti on dri l l s are
most frequentl y used by ri fl e pl atoons and squads.
They are used duri ng the conduct of foot patrol s and
di smounted movements i n cl ose terrai n agai nst
guerri l l as.
The var i ety of dr i l l s i s l i mi ted onl y by the
i magi nati on and i ni ti ati ve of the uni t l eader and the
state of trai ni ng of the uni t. I t i s i mpracti cal to devel op
dri l l s coveri ng every conti ngency; however, i t i s
i mportant to devel op a dri l l for each of the most
frequentl y occurri ng si tuati ons. The response to a
gi ven si tuati on must not be stereotyped, as the enemy
may ul ti matel y capi tal i ze upon ri gi d adherence to the
same tacti cs.
I mmedi ate acti on dr i l l s str ess si mpl i ci ty,
aggressi veness, and rapi d executi on. They demand
al ertness and a hi gh state of i ndi vi dual trai ni ng. Dri l l s
5-10
are of l i ttl e val ue to a uni t i n whi ch the i ndi vi dual
Seabee l acks profi ci ency i n the fundamental combat
ski l l s.
VEHICLE UNLOADING DRILL
When a vehi cl e i s forced to hal t i n the ki l l i ng zone
of an ambush, the debarkati on of occupants must be
organi zed and predri l l ed. On order or si gnal , the
response must be i mmedi ate and each person must act
swi ftl y to move to the proper posi ti on. Confusi on i s
thus overcome and i mmedi ate offensi ve acti on agai nst
the enemy i s more l i kel y to be effecti ve. When the
vehi cl e i s hal ted, the acti ons are as fol l ows:
1. I f the vehi cl e i s har dened, the vehi cl e
commander acts approxi atel y as previ ousl y di scussed.
The vehi cl e commander then commands DEPLOY
RI GHT (OR LEFT), to show the di recti on i n whi ch the
occupants are to assembl e after di smounti ng.
2. Sentri es throw smoke grenades and open fi re
i mmedi atel y on the ambush posi ti ons. The grenadi er,
i f one i s aboard the vehi cl e, fi res on the ambush
posi ti on.
3. Occupants, under cover of fi re from the sentri es,
di smount over both si des of the vehi cl e and move to the
si de of the vehi cl e i ndi cated i n the command. As few
occupants as possi bl e attempt to di smount over the
tai l gate of the vehi cl e.
4. When the occupants have di smounted, the
sentri es di smount under coveri ng fi re from troops on
the ground.
5. The dri ver and assi stant dri ver di smount i n the
di recti on i ndi cated by the vehi cl e commander.
6. When al l occupants are out of the vehi cl e, acti on
i s taken as previ ousl y menti oned i n thi s chapter.
FREEZE AND HASTY AMBUSH DRILL
The freeze and hasty ambush i s a dri l l desi gned to
deal wi th the meeti ng engagement. The dri l l i s
undertaken when the uni t has si ghted guerri l l as
approachi ng but has not yet been seen by them.
I mmedi ate acti on i s taken to ambush the guerri l l as
when thei r approach i s movi ng on a trai l di fferent or
the same used by the uni t.
1. FreezeWhen the guerri l l as are si ghted, the
uni t i s hal ted by si l ent si gnal , such as an arm and hand
or other prearranged speci al si gnal . The si gnal i s
rel ayed to each member of the uni t, and each member
freezes i n thei r tracks wi th thei r weapons i n the fi ri ng
posi ti on.
2. Di ffer en t tr ai l s I f th e gu er r i l l as ar e
approachi ng on a route di fferent from that of the Seabee
uni t, the uni t remai ns on the trai l i n a freeze posi ti on.
The uni t l eader si gnal s Commence Fi ri ng when the
guerri l l as present a sui tabl e target.
3. Same trai l On i ni ti al l y si ghti ng the enemy, the
freeze i s executed. The i ndi vi dual maki ng the si ghti ng
i ndi cates the number of enemy by si l ent si gnal and then
moves off the trai l . Each i ndi vi dual rel ays the si gnal
and moves off the trai l on the same si de used by the
ori gi nator. I t i s essenti al that the enti re uni t move to the
same si de of the trai l . Speed of executi on and si l ent
movements are mandatory. Any unnatural sound may
cause the guerri l l as to turn and fl ee. Each member of
the uni t takes up a fi ri ng posi ti on faci ng the di recti on of
enemy approach. The uni t l eader i ni ti ates the ambush
by fi ri ng hi s or her weapon. I n the event the guerri l l as
si ght and fi re upon a uni t member other than the uni t
l eader, that i ndi vi dual fi res and spri ngs the ambush.
IMMEDIATE ASSAULT DRILL
The i mmedi ate assaul t i s a tacti c used duri ng an
unexpected encounter at cl ose quarters. I t i s a
pr edr i l l ed r esponse to si tuati ons i n whi ch the
guerri l l as and the Seabee uni t become aware of each
other si mul taneousl y. The i mmedi ate assaul t dri l l i s a
rapi dl y executed frontal assaul t.
1. The dri l l i s usual l y i ni ti ated by the fi rst member
of the uni t who si ghts the enemy. He or she fi res at the
enemy and shouts a prearranged si gnal showi ng the
di recti on of the encounter; for exampl e, enemy front
(l eft, ri ght), charge.
2. The si gnal i s repeated by each i ndi vi dual .
3. The uni t adopts the l i ne formati on, ori ented i n
the i ndi cated di recti on of contact. A predesi gnated
subordi nate uni t i s wi thhel d from the l i ne to protect the
fl anks and rear.
4. The uni t l eader sounds a prearranged assaul t
si gnal .
5. The assaul t i s pressed forward unti l hal ted by
the uni t l eader , usual l y when the guer r i l l as ar e no l onger
i nsi ght.
COUNTER AMBUSH DRILL
There i s no general l y accepted i mmedi ate acti on
for foot troops when ambushed. Adherence to the
5-11
pri nci pl e of securi ty i n avoi di ng an ambush i s easi er
than to escape from one. When ambushed, vi ol ent and
concerted reacti on i s requi red to prevent anni hi l ati on.
Uni ts must have a prearranged pl an, known to every
troop, whi ch al l ots a speci fi c i mmedi ate acti on to each
i ndi vi dual accor di ng to hi s or her l ocati on and
functi on i n the formati on.
Entire Unit in Killing Zone
I t i s sel dom possi bl e to fi nd covered or conceal ed
posi ti ons wi thi n the ki l l i ng zone from whi ch to
exchange fi re wi th the enemy. The uni t may execute
the i mmedi ate assaul t i n the di recti on shown by the
uni t l eader. The di recti on shown i s normal l y the
weakest poi nt i n the ambush and i s a prearranged
counter ambush dri l l .
The uni t may i ni ti al l y execute a prepl anned
movement to a posi ti on outsi de the ki l l i ng zone
i ndi cated by the uni t l eader. Normal l y, the posi ti on i s
one that provi des cover and conceal ment and i s the
l ocati on from whi ch a subsequent dri l l i s undertaken
to el i mi nate the enemy.
Leading Element in Killing Zone
When onl y the foremost el ements of the uni t are
caught i n the ki l l i ng zone, an i mmedi ate enci rcl i ng
attack i s executed and acti ons are taken as fol l ows:
1. El ements wi thi n the ambush i ndi cate the nature
and l ocati on of the ambush by prearranged si gnal ; for
exampl e, by voi ce ambush front (l eft, ri ght) or by
whi stl e or other si gnal s.
2. Previ ousl y determi ned ambushed el ements,
execute an i mmedi ate assaul t.
3. Previ ousl y determi ned base of fi re el ements
from personnel not yet engaged i n the ambush, assume
base of fi re posi ti ons. These fi res si mul taneousl y
suppor t enci r cl i ng maneuver el ements and the
personnel i n the ki l l i ng zone.
4. The enci rcl i ng attack uni ts move out i n a
prearranged envel opment of the enemy fl ank and/or
rear (fi g. 5-7).
NOTE: Take care i n assaul ti ng the mai n ambush
force, as mi nes are commonl y used to protect i ts
fl anks.
5. Whenever possi bl e, the enemy r ear i s
envel oped. The assaul t by the enci rcl i ng uni ts dri ves
the enemy i nto the fi res of the base of fi re el ements.
SUMMARY
The company commander must trai n hi s or her
tr oops i n convoy defensi ve techni ques. OPSEC
measures must be consi dered duri ng the pl anni ng
process and practi ced duri ng day-to-day haul i ng
operati ons. The pri mary types of engagement l i kel y
to be encountered duri ng convoy movements are
attacks by ai r, arti l l ery, sni per, ambush, and NBC. The
convoy commander must ensure that subordi nate
commanders and dri vers are aware of and trai ned on
Figure 5-7.Encircling attack.
5-12
the procedures to be used for countering the different
type of attacks. Active and passive defense
techniques must be learned and practiced. In an
ambush situation, immediate reaction and aggressive
leadership are essential to limit casualties and damage
to vehicles, cargo, and personnel.
The following is a list of ambush instructions that
was developed from lessons learned during the
Vietnam War.
Before Ambush
1.
route.
Be alert for changes in familiar scenes along the
2. Expect ambush upon detonation of mines,
automatic weapons fire, and heavy sniper fire.
During Ambush
1. Notify security force by radio call using
prearranged signals. (Do not tie up the radio nets with
unnecessary conversation. Maintain strict radio
discipline.)
2. Continue moving, maintaining vehicle distance
if possible.
3. Place any tracked vehicles in front to activate
further detonation of road mines.
4. If disabled, steer off the road to allow passage
of other vehicles.
5. If disabled and the convoy is moving through
the killing zone, mount a passing vehicle.
6. Do not enter the killing zone when it can be
avoided.
7. Provide flanking support fire into the killing
zone.
8. Security vehicles apply maximum base of fire;
fight as a team; deploy upon command.
9. Prime targets are enemy automatic weapons
positions, enemy mortar, rocket positions, and
assaulting ground forces.
After Ambush
1. Protect and care for wounded; evacuate
wounded as soon as possible.
2. After contact has been broken, reopen roadway,
ensuring that it is free of mines.
3. Do not attempt to remove mines; contact
explosive ordnance disposal.
4. Provide flank security while the convoy passes
through the area.
5. When contact is broken, do not give chase.
6. Stay alert for a counterattack
7. Remember details.
5-13
CHAPTER 6
CHEMICAL, BIOLOGICAL, AND RADIOLOGICAL
DECONTAMINATION
The presence of contamination can greatly reduce the
effectiveness of the combat forces. Contamination forces
personnel to wear protective equipment that degrades their
ability to conduct individual and collective tasks.
Therefore, an understanding of the behavior and
characteristics of contamination enables personnel to
better direct their efforts in taking countermeasures to
avoid or reduce a nuclear, a biological, and a chemical
hazard. Consideration of these factors will help the
individual Seabee, planner, and leader in the integration
of CBR defensive measures in tactical operations.
Companies in a battalion are required to have at
least one six-man team trained to perform decon
operations. Obtaining the required skills through
training at the 20th NCR or 31st NCR is strongly
i encouraged to become decon qualified. Therefore,
this chapter is only designed to familiarize the reader
with decon operations and decon terms.
NOTE: Nuclear, biological, and chemical
warfare (NBC) and chemical, biological, and
radiological warfare (CBR) are similar. Army field
manuals (FMs) and Marine Corps field manuals
(FMFMs) refer to CBR as NBC; therefore, when this
chapter refers to CBR, it is also referring to NBC.
FORMS OF CONTAMINATION
Successful decontamination (decon) requires that you
understand the forms of contamination and what makes it
dangerous. The different origins and forms of
contamination cause different hazards. A brief discussion
of the major forms and origins of contamination will
clarify the meaning of contamination, as it is used in this
chapter.
SOLIDS
Chemical agents, biological agents, and
radiological contamination can all take solid forms.
Often, they appear as fine dust. The dust could take
the form of radioactive dirt (fallout), a frozen chemical
mist, or a dust pollinated with biological toxins and/or
biological spores. Another form is a powder, coated
with chemical/biological agents (for example, dusty
mustard).
LIQUIDS
Liquid contamination is generally delivered in a
mist, a vapor, or rain that falls to the ground. Liquid
contamination can be made thick, like syrup or gelatin.
It sticks to what it touches and evaporates slowly. Low
vapor pressure and high viscosity make it difficult to
decontaminate. Chemical, biological, and nuclear
contaminates, when mixed with rain, can contaminate
large areas. When the washout evaporates, the solid
or liquid contamination may remain for some time.
GASES
Chemical contaminants give off vapors. Toxic
chemical agents, delivered as a gas cloud, are used
either directly on the target or upwind of the target.
Depending on the weather conditions, wind currents
can spread toxic gas clouds over a large area. Most
toxic gases disperse or evaporate quite readily.
However, surfaces, contaminated with liquid chemical
agents, may give off toxic gases for days.
TYPES OF CONTAMINATION
HAZARDS
If you understand the contamination hazards
(transfer, spread, vapor, desorption, and radiation),
you will understand contamination characteristics.
This will help you to understand the importance of
decon in successfully completing your mission under
CBR conditions.
TRANSFER
Anything that touches a surface covered with
liquid or solid contamination will tend to pickup that
contamination and move it from one surface to
another. You must eliminate or limit contamination
transfer into clean areas. For example, troops,
climbing in and out of a contaminated vehicle, can
transfer agents to the inside of the vehicle. This
activity results in two hazards: inhaling the gas given
off by the agent brought into the vehicle and physical
contact with the agent brought into the vehicle.
6-1
Touching a surface covered with a liquid chemical
agent can spread contamination on the same surface,
thus increasing the size of the contaminated area.
When this condition occurs, more decontaminates
along with more of an effort will be spent deconing.
Therefore, limit the spread of contamination to a clean
surface by decontaminating it with a designated
decontaminate and/or the appropriate equipment.
VAPOR
A vapor hazard includes any contamination you
can breathe, no matter what form it takes, such as dust
in the air, atomized liquids (aerosols), or true gases.
Generally, vapors in an open/outdoor area disperse
rapidly so you do not need to decontaminate them.
However, some agent vapors, such as atomized blister,
create a transfer hazard because they settle from the
air and coat the surfaces they touch. Since solid or
liquid contamination remains on a surface, it can
continually generate new vapors. Liquid
contamination, mixed with dust, can result in a vapor
hazard due to wind or movement of vehicles.
Generally, when a transfer or spread hazard exists, a
vapor hazard could also exist.
DESORPTION
Liquid chemical contamination quickly absorbs
into porous surfaces. Once absorbed, it begins to
desorb or give off gas; that is, low levels of vapor pass
out of the contaminated surface into the air and can be
transferred to any surface that contacts it, including
bare skin. For example, if you were operating a
vehicle that was desorbing a nerve agent, you should
protect yourself by wearing, as a minimum, your
protective mask and gloves. Exposure to the
desorbing nerve agent might blur your vision or
interfere with your ability to think clearly. Handling
a steering wheel bare-handed when it is desorbing
nerve agent may also cause acute nerve agent
poisoning. Prevent desorption by decontaminating
quickly before any agent can be absorbed into the
surface. Surfaces, protected with a chemical agent
resistant coating (CARC) that consists of a
polyurethane paint coating, can prevent agent
absorption. These surfaces can be easily
decontaminated with soap and hot water or DS2.
RADIATION
The penetrating energy of radiation does not
directly fall into any of the previous categories.
Radiation is given off by radioactive dust or dirt, most
of which appears as fallout. For decon purposes,
radiation can be thought of as a solid. Radioactive
contamination can usually be removed by brushing,
wiping, or shaking. Decontaminate quickly to
decrease the cumulative effects of radiation;
otherwise, small but frequent exposure to radiation
may cause radiation sickness.
PERSISTENCY
The length of time a hazard remains depends on
the persistency of the contamination. A full
discussion of detection and hazard prediction for all
types of contamination is given in Army manuals FM
3-3 and FM 3-3-l.
CHEMICAL
Nonpersistent contamination generally requires
no decon. However, the duration and effectiveness of
chemical agents used on the battlefield will depend on
a series of factors that affect agent persistency. Some
of these factors are as follows:
l Type of contamination
0 Contamination density and droplet size
l Temperature
l Wind speed
l Sunlight
* Humidity and rain
l Composition of the contaminated surface
l Type of soil and terrain
Any contamination found on your skin must be
decontaminated immediately, regardless of
persistency. Some contamination hazards can affect
you within minutes after touching your skin (an agent
like CX will affect you within seconds). After you
conduct skin decon, use detection equipment to
determine the type of contamination. This will help
to decide whether additional decon and/or treatment
is required.
6-2
Changes to the physi cal behavi or of chemi cal
agents can be caused by changes i n weather
con d i ti on s . For ex ampl e, i n col d weath er ,
nonpersi stent agents tend to become semi persi stent,
l asti ng from 2 to 10 days. Refer to FM 3-6, Fi el d
Behavior of NBC Agents, for detai l ed i nformati on.
BIOLOGICAL
The many var i abl es, i nvol ved i n esti mati ng
persi stency of bi ol ogi cal hazards, requi re separate
consi derati on for each i nstance of contami nati on.
Speci al l y trai ned medi cal personnel wi l l consi der
s peci fi c tr eatmen t di r ecti on on l y after th e
contami nati on has been speci fi cal l y i denti fi ed. For
exampl e, bi ol ogi cal agents wi l l persi st l onger i n col d
weather. Temperate i nversi ons (stabl e condi ti ons)
that exi st over snowfi el ds al so tend to prol ong the stay
of an aeorsol i zed bi ol ogi cal cl oud.
RADIOLOGICAL
A general i dea of the persi stency of radi ol ogi cal
hazards can be gai ned by taki ng radi ati on dose
readi ngs. At thi s ti me, the NCF uses two types of
radi oacti ve detecti on and computati on (RADI AC)
i nstruments:
1. Th e AN/PDR-27 i n s tr u men t pr ov i des
radi oacti vi ty detecti on i n the l ower ranges. I t i s
desi gned to detect beta radi ati on and measure and detect
gamma nucl ear radi ati on. The AN/PDR-27 i s al so used
to moni tor l ow l evel radi ati on contami nati on on
personnel , suppl i es, and equi pment.
2. AN/PDR-43 i nstrument provi des detecti on of
radi oacti vi ty i n the hi gh range. I t i s desi gned to detect
beta radi ati on and measure and detect gamma nucl ear
radi ati on.
NOTE: Onl y qual i fi ed personnel are authori zed
to operate RADI AC i nstruments.
For operati onal purposes, you can use the 7-10
rul e of thumb to esti mate future radi ati on l evel s.
This rule provides a general estimate and should be
used for planning only. The rate of radi oacti ve decay
i s proporti onal over ti me. The 7-10 rul e means that
for seven mul ti pl es of ti me after the burst, the radi ati on
i ntensi ty wi l l decrease by a factor of 10. For exampl e,
i f 2 hours after the burst your radi ati on readi ng i s
100 Centi gray (cGy) (rad) per hour, then 14 hours
after the burst (7 ti mes 2 hours), you can expect a
readi ng of about 10 cGy (100 cGy di vi ded by 10).
Radi ati on contami nati on i s not affected by cl i mati c
condi ti ons or other vari abl es that affect chemi cal
contami nati on. The Ar my manual , FM 3-3-1,
descri bes radi ati on decay rates i n detai l .
NEGLIGIBLE RISK
You must consi der decon i f the l evel s of
contami nati on exceed negl i gi bl e ri sk l evel s.
BIOLOGICAL AND CHEMICAL
Negl i gi bl e ri sk l evel s for bi ol ogi cal and chemi cal
contami nati on are contami nati on that wi l l cause mi l d
i ncapaci tati on among no more than 5 percent of
unprotected troops operati ng for 12 conti nuous hours
wi th i n 1 meter of con ta mi n a ted s u r f a ces .
Measurements that determi ne safe l evel s are made
wi th detecti on equi pment hel d 1 i nch away from the
surface. For exampl e, a one bar readi ng di spl ayed on
the chemi cal agent
reduced hazard l evel
negl i gi bl e ri sk l evel .
RADIOLOGICAL
moni tor (CAM) i ndi cates a
that shoul d be consi dered as a
Negl i gi bl e r i s k l ev el s f or r a d i ol ogi ca l
contami nati on are measurements of 0.33 centi gray
(cGy) or l ess. Thi s l evel of radi ati on wi l l cause no
mor e than 2.5 per cent mi l d i ncapaci tati on to
unprotected troops.
CONTAMINATION COMBINATIONS
Si mul taneous enemy CBR attacks wi l l probabl y
be part of the strategy of the enemy. Ri sk assessments
i ncl ude consi der ati on that the enemy may use
combi nati ons of nucl ear, bi ol ogi cal , and chemi cal
weapons or may use any of these combi ned wi th
conventi onal fi re. Once CBR weapons have been
i ntroduced on the battl efi el d, the enemy may try to
decei ve you regardi ng the type of hazard.
The thermal effects of a nucl ear bl ast mi ght
destroy the effects of any chemi cal or bi ol ogi cal
6-3
weapons used si mul taneousl y. However, chemi cal or
bi ol ogi cal weapons effecti veness i s i ncreased i f used
fol l owi ng a nucl ear attack. Nucl ear bl ast casual ti es
and psychol ogi cal l y stressed troops are vul nerabl e to
a CBR agent attack. Agents coul d enter col l ecti ve
protecti ve shel ters, communi cati on faci l i ti es, and
vehi cl es damaged by the nucl ear detonati on.
Wh en CBR con tami n ati on h azar ds ex i s t,
decontaminate the chemical agents first. Chemi cal
agents are normal l y the most l ethal and fastest acti ng
type of contami nati on. The decon methods for
chemi cal agents are al so effecti ve for neutral i zi ng or
removi ng bi ol ogi cal and radi ol ogi cal contami nati on.
The reverse i s not true.
The enemy may use a mi xture of agents i n thei r
muni ti ons to cause mul ti pl e types of contami nati on.
Such mi xtures coul d be used to achi eve the fol l owi ng
vari ous purposes:
1. Lower the freezi ng poi nt of the agents and
i ncrease agent persi stency, such as mustard l ewi si te
mi xture.
2. Create both percutaneous (through the ski n) and
i nhal ati on hazards, such as thi ckened GD and GB.
3. Compl i cate agent i denti fi cati on of mi xed
agents, maki ng treatment of casual ti es more di ffi cul t.
4. Combi ne agents wi th both i mmedi ate and
l ong-term persi stency, such as anthrax, wi th an
i ncubati on peri od of 1 to 5 days and hi stopl asmosi s
(pul monary i nfecti on di sease) wi th an i ncubati on
peri od of 5 to 18 days.
There i s no fi el d detecti ng system that can detect or
i denti fy bi ol ogi cal agents. Therefore, combi nati ons of
bi ol ogi cal and chemi cal contami nants present a
di fferent chal l enge. Thi s chal l enge can be deal t wi th
i f standard chemi cal decon measures are fol l owed at
once. Use standard chemi cal decontami nants when
combi nati ons are known or suspected to exi st. They
can be used for toxi ns and bi ol ogi cal agents as wel l as
chemi cal agents. See appendi x I V for a descri pti on of
fi el d expedi ent chemi cal decontami nants for use
agai nst these hazards.
Do not base decon measures sol el y upon the fi rst
hazard i denti fi ed. Make sure you check thoroughl y to
i denti fy al l agent hazards. When speci fi c agents are
detected, take appropri ate decon measures.
REASONS FOR DECON
You must have a good i dea of the reasons for
decon and the types/techni ques of decon. You must
assess your tacti cal si tuati on and consi der your decon
resources wi thi n the context of mi ssi on, enemy,
terrai n, troops, and ti me avai l abl e (METT-T). You
must know the pri nci pl es of decon and know how
decon affects your combat power. Protecti ve cl othi ng
and equi pment (MOPP gear) and col l ecti ve protecti on
shel ters offer onl y a temporary sol uti on. Decon i s a
more permanent sol uti on because i t i ncl udes the
removal , the destructi on, or the neutral i zati on of
contami nati on. When you have become contami nated,
there are practi cal reasons why at l east some decon
must occur as soon as possi bl e. You must use these
decon concepts i n sel ecti ng the best acti on to take to
accompl i sh your mi ssi on.
Decon shoul d be consi dered wi thi n the context of
METT-T and resources avai l abl e. The four factors
that must be addr essed befor e you deci de to
decontami nate are as fol l ows:
Lethal i ty
Performance degradati on
Equi pment l i mi tati ons
Transfer and spread
LETHALITY
Some types of contami nati on are so toxi c they can
ki l l or i ncapaci tate i f they contact exposed ski n for a
few mi nutes. I f your ski n becomes contami nated, you
must stop breathi ng, mask, gi ve the al arm, and
decontami nate your ski n i mmedi atel y. Peri odi cal l y,
observe for nerve agent symptoms i f the agent type i s
unknown.
PERFORMANCE DEGRADATION
MOPP (mi ssi on-ori ented protecti ve posture) gear
provi des protecti on but al so degrades performance.
The l onger you are i n MOPP 4, the l ower your
effi ci ency. Usi ng tool s and weapons whi l e weari ng
the protecti ve gl oves i s awkward. The mask reduces
your fi el d of vi ew, maki ng i t di ffi cul t to
opti cal si ghts and ni ght vi si on devi ces.
use some
Extended
6-4
operations in MOPP gear tire and discourage troops.
Troops cannot eat while wearing a mask. Urinating
and defecating are potentially dangerous in a
contaminated area. Even resting an-d sleeping are
difficult because it is hard to breathe through the mask.
Hot or humid climates compound these problems
because the mask makes breathing more difficult.
EQUIPMENT LIMITATIONS
MOPP gear provides protection from chemical
and biological agent attacks, but some limitations can
reduce its effectiveness. Agents can gradually
penetrate the mask hood. However, the protective
qualities of the hood can be extended many hours if
the chemical agent is removed or decontaminated
quickly before it penetrates the hood.
Two primary types of chemical protective
overgarments are in use at this time with different
protection. The first is the chemical protective
overgarment (CPO) that is currently in the TOA of
each battalion. In an uncontaminated environment,
the CPO is good for 140 hours within 30 days after the
initial opening of the original protective package and
subject to the following conditions:
l When not worn, store in a sealed plastic bag.
l The 140 hours is only applicable to wear time.
The clock stops while the overgarment is stored
in a plastic bag.
l Overgarments that have come into contact with
POLs must be replaced.
In a contaminated environment, 6 hours of
protection is provided and the CPO is subject to the
following:
1. Once in a contaminated environment, the 6-hour
criteria vice 140-hour criteria becomes the controlling
parameter. If chemical liquid contamination remains
after 6 hours, MOPP gear exchange must be conducted
as soon as possible. MOPP Gear Exchange will be
discussed further on in this chapter.
2. If cumulative wear time is 138 hours and the
environment becomes contaminated, the suit may be
. worn an additional 6 hours for a maximum cumulative
wear time of 144 hours.
The second type of overgarment that is currently
not in the TOA is the battle dress overgarment (BDO).
It provides protection for 24 hours after becoming
contaminated with liquid chemical agents.
6-5
Troop performance will decrease over time while
they are in full MOPP; therefore, risk assessment must
be conducted before executing a task or mission. For
example, you should know that the following critical
areas or tasks are degraded:
l Navigation and terrain orientation
l Target acquisition
l The decision-making process (leader fatigue)
l Communications
0 Fire support coordination
0 Maneuver formations/convoy operations
Unit commanders, conducting extended
operations in full MOPP gear, weigh the risk of
whether or not to conduct decon. The unit commander
must consider the capabilities and limitations of the
unit while performing in MOPP during different types
of conditions. Refer to the Seabee Combat Handbook,
volume 1, chapter 19.
A contamination hazard will be reduced by
conducting hasty decon and exchange of the MOPP
gear. This action also provides temporary relief from
MOPP and the reduction of risk during combat
operations. The commander considers the time and
the resources needed to conduct decon versus the
degradation caused by operating in full MOPP gear.
The commander also understands that before ordering
the removal of protective masks, they must move their
unit to a clean area and conduct unmasking
procedures. After hasty decon (MOPP gear exchange
and vehicle wash down), the Seabee s risk is reduced
by the following:
1. Decreasing the time personnel are exposed to
chemical agents.
2. Providing temporary relief from full MOPP.
This aids in increasing survivability of the unit on the
battlefield because the MOPP encapsulation causes
limitations that may result in conventional casualties
(for example, heat stress in combat).
3. Decreasing the risk of transfer and spreading of
contamination.
MOPP gear provides little direct protection from
the hazards of radiological (rad) contamination, such
as the radiation from fallout. But commanders may
often decide to use MOPP gear for its indirect
advantages. MOPP 4 can prevent the inhalation of
Third, decontaminate as far forward as possible
(limit spread). Do not transport contaminated
personnel and equipment away from your operational
area if you can bring decon assets forward safely. This
will keep your equipment on location where it is
needed, allow decon to begin earlier, and limit the
spread of contamination to other areas.
radioactive particles, keep
and greatly simplify decon
contamination off the skin,
danger from
Fourth, decontaminate by priority. Clean
important items of equipment first and the least
important items last. The COC will prioritize the
equipment for decontamination.
LEVELS OF DECONTAMINATION
Three levels of decon are used today: immediate
operational, and thorough. All three levels (fig. 6-l)
are discussed in this chapter.
IMMEDIATE DECON
. Although the
fallout is not immediate, the radiation may gradually
build up to a dangerous level. Therefore, the
contamination must be removed when the mission
allows. The protective mask filter elements will need
to be replaced because of radioactive particle buildup.
TRANSFER AND SPREAD
You must avoid contamination as much as
possible. Once a unit becomes contaminated with a
chemical agent, quick or rapid decon is critical to
prevent further spread or transfer of contamination
onto a clean area or surface. Rapid decon may allow
the unit to be in the lowest MOPP level possible and
preserve its combat power.
PRINCIPLES OF DECONTAMINATION
The aim of immediate decon is to minimize
casualties, save lives, and limit the spread of
contamination. Immediate decon is carried out
bY
individuals upon becoming contaminated. Three
immediate decon techniques are used today:
The resources of manpower, time, and material are
critical for your decision on how to sustain combat
operations. Two concepts must be considered: the
use of these resources and the ability to sustain combat
operations. You must know when, where, what, and
how to perform decon by following the four principles
discussed in the following paragraphs.
. Skin decon
l Personal wipe down
l Operator s spray down
First, decontaminate as soon as possible. This is the
most important principle of the four. Consider this
principle before you consider any other. Contamination
hazards force you into higher levels of MOPP and
immediately begin to degrade the ability to perform your
mission. The sooner the contamination is removed, the
sooner you can reduce MOPP levels.
OPERATIONAL DECON
The aim of operational decon is to sustain
operations, reduce the contact hazard, and limit the
spread of contamination. Operational decon will also
eliminate the necessity or reduce the duration of
wearing MOPP gear. Operational decon is done by
individuals and/or units. It is restricted to specific
parts of operationally essential equipment, material,
and/or working areas. Operational decon minimizes
contact and transfer hazards. Further decon may be
required to reduce contamination to negligible risk
levels. Two operational decon techniques are used
Second, decontaminate only what is necessary. You
cannot waste precious resources decontaminating
everything. Decontaminate only what is necessary to
continue your mission. Consider the following factors
when you decide whether decon will interfere with the
mission:
today:
l Vehicle wash down
l Mission- tempo of battle
. MOPP gear exchange
l Time available
THOROUGHDECON
a
Degree of contamination
The aim of thorough decon is to reduce or
eliminate the need for individual protective clothing.
Thorough decon iS carried out to reduce
l Length of time you have been in MOPP 4
l Decon assets available
Figure 6-1.Decon techniques.
contami nati on on personnel , equi pment/materi al ,
and/or worki ng areas to the l owest possi bl e l evel
(negl i gi bl e r i sk). Thi s permi ts the reducti on or
removal of i ndi vi dual protecti ve equi pment and
mai ntai ns operati ons wi th the l east degradati on.
Thorough decon reduces CBR contami nati on l evel s to
a negl i gi bl e ri sk. There are two thorough decon
techni ques that Seabees use:
. Detai l ed troop decon (DTD)
. Detai l ed equi pment decon (DED)
We now k now that contami nati on causes
casual ti es and restri cts the use of equi pment and
terrai n. Decontami nati on reduces or el i mi nates the
hazard and permi ts uni ts to conti nue thei r mi ssi on. We
al so know the three l evel s of decontami nati on. We
wi l l now di scuss decontami nati on operati ons for each
l evel of decontami nati on.
IMMEDIATE DECON OPERATIONS
I mmedi ate decon techni ques are i ni ti ated by the
i ndi vi dual Seabee, wi thout command, once he or she
i s aware they have contami nati on on thei r bare ski n.
The i ndi vi dual Seabee uses hi s or her personal M291
or M258A1 ski n decon ki t to decontami nate exposed
ski n. Next, they decontami nate thei r MOPP gear and
weapon, usi ng the M280DKI E (decon ki t, i ndi vi dual
equi pment) or wi th an addi ti onal M291/M258A1 ki t.
Use these i tems for chemi cal and bi ol ogi cal
contami nati on removal onl y.
Radi ol ogi cal contami nati on hazards affect you
di fferentl y, but the pri nci pl e i s the same. Remove
r adi ol ogi cal contami nati on fr om equi pment and
personnel by brushi ng and/or usi ng soap and water,
r especti vel y.
SKIN DECONTAMINATION
I f chemi cal agents contact your ski n, you must
take i mmedi ate acti on to decontami nate yoursel f.
Start the ski n decon techni que wi thi n 1 mi nute of
becomi ng contami nated. Some toxi c chemi cal agents,
especi al l y nerve agents, are rapi dl y absorbed by the
ski n and can ki l l i n mi nutes.
I ndi vi dual decon ki ts (I DK), M291 or M258A1
(fi g. 6-2), provi de the best means of ski n decon.
I nstructi ons and procedures are on the outsi de of the
ki t.
The sol uti ons i n the M258A1 ki t are causti c. Keep
them out of the eyes, nose, wounds, and mouth. Use
water to wash toxi c agent or decon sol uti on out of the
eyes or wounds and seek medi cal tr eatment.
Fami l i ari ze yoursel f wi th the operati ng i nstructi ons
for both ki ts because of the di fferences i n the M258A1
and M291 ki ts. The M258A1 uses a moi st towel ette
wi th a decon sol uti on, whereas the M291 uses a
p owd er . Al th ou gh y ou ca n n ot s ee l i qu i d
contami nati on i n the dark, you must be prepared to
decontami nate duri ng darkness. The M258A1 wi pe 1
packet has an i denti fyi ng tab that you can feel i n the
dark.
6-7
Figure 6-2.Skin decontamination kits.
WARNING
Sol uti ons i n the M258A1 decon ki t are
fl ammabl e and unstabl e i n stor age at
temperatures above 110F (43C) or for l ong
peri ods i n sunl i ght. Al so, protect i t from
freezi ng temperatures. Used at 32F (0C) or
bel ow, the sol uti on may cause frostbi te.
I f you do not have a ski n decon ki t, chemi cal
contami nati on may be pi nch-bl otted from the ski n
wi th a cl oth and the area fl ushed wi th water from your
canteen. Pi nch-bl otti ng i s better than rubbi ng because
i t l i mi ts the spread of the contami nati on. Soap, i f
avai l abl e, can al so be used to wash the agent from the
ski n. Washi ng wi th soap and water (or hot water) i s
the next best method for toxi c agent decon. Thi s
method i s not as effecti ve as usi ng the decon ki ts.
NOTE: The M291 ski n decon ki t repl aces the
M258A1 ski n decon ki t. However, there wi l l sti l l be
a ti me when the two ki ts are avai l abl e i n the fi el d.
Biological
Currentl y, no means exi sts of detecti ng bi ol ogi cal
agents. You probabl y wi l l not know i mmedi atel y
wh en y ou h av e become con tami n ated. Mos t
bi ol ogi cal agents, except toxi ns, pose thei r pri mary
threat through i nhal ati on or i ngesti on. The ski n i s an
effecti ve barri er agai nst most bi ol ogi cal agents i f i t has
no cuts or scratches.
Uni t corpsmen know the types and l evel s of
natural i nfecti on for the area of operati ons. They
moni tor these l evel s. I f a gi ven di sease reaches a hi gh
l evel , they deci de whether or not a del i ber ate
bi ol ogi cal attack has occurred.
The best bi ol ogi cal defense i s to take acti on before
you are attacked. Keep i mmuni zati ons up-to-date,
observe basi c sani tary precauti ons, and keep ski n
breaks covered. Treat mi nor cuts or abrasi ons by
ordi nary fi rst-ai d measures (i odi ne, Zephi ran, or
Merthi ol ate). Washi ng wi th soap and water removes
nearl y al l bi ol ogi cal agents from the ski n. Frequent
showeri ng or bathi ng l essens chances of i nfecti on and
di sease. A 0.5 per cent sodi um hypochl or i te
(househol d bl each) sol uti on i s al so an effecti ve
bi ol ogi cal decontami nant. Appendi x I V tel l s how to
make thi s sol uti on.
Radiological
Because no i mmedi ate l i fe-threateni ng hazard i s
caused by radi ol ogi cal contami nati on, no i mmedi ate
ski n decon i s requi red. However, wash exposed areas
of your sk i n when possi bl e. I f your sk i n i s
contami nated by radi ol ogi cal contami nati on, use
operati onal decon techni ques i mmedi atel y. (See
MOPP Gear Exchange for a detai l ed di scussi on on
r edu ci n g r adi ati on l ev el s fr om r adi ol ogi cal
contami nati on.)
6-8
PERSONAL WIPE DOWN
The per sonal wi pe down techni que i s most
effecti ve when done wi thi n 15 mi nutes of bei ng
contami nated. Every Seabee wi pes down hi s or her
mask, hood, gl oves, and other essenti al gear. (An
excepti on i s when a thi ckened agent i s gl obed on the
overgarment.) For chemi cal and bi ol ogi cal decon,
Seabees use thei r ski n decon ki ts. Radi ol ogi cal
contami nati on may be brushed away.
Do not attempt to remove chemi cal contami nati on
fr om your pr otecti ve over gar ment. The speci al
protecti ve properti es of the garment mi ni mi ze hazards
f r om ch emi ca l a gen ts . H owev er , br u s h of f
radi ol ogi cal , bi ol ogi cal , or frozen chemi cal agent
contami nati on from your overgarment.
I f radi ol ogi cal contami nati on i s not removed, your
radi ati on exposure wi l l i ncrease over ti me.
Chemical
The stocks and handgri ps of i ndi vi dual weapons
al so tend to absorb chemi cal agents. Once absorbed,
they may present a vapor hazard for days. To reduce
thi s penetrati on and vapor hazard, decontami nate
i ndi vi dual equi pment usi ng the M291 or the M258A1
ki ts. You must decontami nate gl oves, hood and mask,
hel met, and weapon i f they ar e contami nated.
Perform personal and equi pment wi pe down wi thi n 15
mi nutes after bei ng exposed to l i qui d contami nati on.
Addi ti onal l y, weari ng your Kevl ar hel met protecti ve
cover wi l l prevent or reduce the absorpti on of any
l i qui d chemi cal agent.
I f an agent i s gl obed on your overgarment, you
may scr ape i t off wi th a sti ck or other object;
otherwi se, do not attempt to decontami nate chemi cal
agents on your overgarment. Thi s wi l l provi de l i ttl e,
i f any, extra protecti on and you probabl y wi l l not have
enough M291 and M258A1 decon wi pes to do so.
Decon wi pe 1 works better agai nst the G-type of
nerve agents but can burn your ski n. Decon wi pe 2
works better agai nst CX-type of nerve agents and
bl i ster agents. Addi ti onal l y, decon wi pe 2 i s not as
causti c to the ski n and shoul d hel p to neutral i ze some
of the causti c compounds i n wi pe 1. When M291 and
M258A1 decon wi pes ar e not avai l abl e, fi el d
expedi ent methods, such as washi ng wi th soap, water,
and bl each sol uti on, are parti al l y effecti ve (see
appendi x V).
Biological
I f you know or suspect toxi ns or other bi ol ogi cal
agents are present, remove the contami nati on wi th
soap and water. I f water i s not avai l abl e, use M258A1
decon wi pes i n the same manner as descri bed for
chemi cal agent decon.
Radiological
Radi ol ogi cal contami nati on can r eadi l y be
detected and l ocated wi th moni tori ng equi pment.
Remove the contami nati on and you reduce the hazard.
Brush the dust off your l oad-beari ng equi pment and
mask carri er. I f you are contami nated wi th a dry
contami nant, such as fal l out, shake your cl othi ng and
gear. Wash the exposed areas of your ski n. Use
M258A1 decon wi pes i f soap and water are not
avai l abl e. Pay parti cul ar attenti on to your hai r and
fi ngernai l s. Avoi d breathi ng the dust you shake off by
weari ng a pi ece of cl oth over your face. I f you were
contami nated by a wet radi ol ogi cal contami nant, you
must i mmedi atel y conduct a MOPP gear exchange.
Br ushi ng or shaki ng wi l l not r emove the wet
radi ol ogi cal contami nant or i ts hazard. Wi pe off your
mask, hood, hel met, gl oves, footwear covers, and
other personal equi pment wi th warm, soapy water. I f
warm, soapy water i s unavai l abl e, use rags or damp
paper towel s. Ensure contami nati on i s not spread to
cl ean areas.
OPERATORS SPRAY DOWN
After you have decontami nated yoursel f and
your personal equi pment, you may need to decon
other mi ssi on-essenti al porti ons of your equi pment
before conti nui ng your mi ssi on. For exampl e, you
may need to decon the vehi cl e you are operati ng or
a crew-served weapon. To ensure you do not pi ckup
contami nati on fr om these i tems, decontami nate
those surfaces you or your crew must touch whi l e
operati ng the equi pment. Thi s decon i s cal l ed the
operators spray down and i s most effecti ve when
done wi thi n 15 mi nutes after personal wi pe down.
Starti ng thi s techni que l ater i s not as effecti ve;
contami nati on, especi al l y chemi cal agents, wi l l
probabl y have spread and wi l l be more di ffi cul t to
remove by thi s techni que.
Chemical
Decontami nate those surfaces you must touch to
do your j ob. Use an onboar d por tabl e decon
apparatus, such as M11 or M13 (fi g. 6-3).
6-9
Figure 6-3.Portable decon apparatus.
Spray DS2 onto those surfaces you must touch to
do your mi ssi on. Scrub the DS2 i nto the surface wi th
brushes. Wai t 30 mi nutes, then wash i t off. I f a decon
apparatus i s not avai l abl e, use the fi el d expedi ent
resources avai l abl e to appl y DS2 or supertropi cal
bl each (STB) from the bul k contai ners. I f necessary,
use nonstandar d decontami nants di scussed i n
appendi x I V.
Biological
A bl each sol uti on i s the preferred decontami nant
for bi ol ogi cal contami nati on; however, i f i t i s not
avai l abl e, use hot, soapy water. Appl y the bl each
sol uti on wi th brushes and scrub the surface wel l .
Ri nse the surface after scrubbi ng (a 30-mi nute wai t i s
not requi red). DS2 or STB i s al so effecti ve agai nst
most known bi ol ogi cal contami nati on, but because of
thei r causti c natur e ar e not pr efer r ed. Other
nonstandard bi ol ogi cal decontami nants are descri bed
i n appendi x I V.
WARNING
Al ways use extr eme cauti on when
handl i ng DS2.
Some i mpor tan t factor s th at s h ou l d be
remembered when handl i ng DS2 are as fol l ows:
* Do not mi x DS2 and STB because mi xi ng the
two wi l l cause a fi re.
DS2 i s a combusti bl e sol uti on and shoul d not be
sprayed on personnel or protecti ve cl othi ng.
Severe chemi cal burns can resul t i f personnel
fai l to observe al l safety precauti ons.
DS2 can severel y i njure eyes and ski n and, i f
i nhal ed, can cause i l l ness.
DS2 can damage CBR protecti ve overgarments,
protecti ve gl oves, hood, and overboots.
Radiological
I f you are contami nated by fal l out, rai n out,
neutr on-i nduced contami nati on, or any type of
radi ol ogi cal agent, use your moni tori ng equi pment to
hel p l ocate contami nati on. Then decontami nate as
requi red. I f detecti on equi pment i s not avai l abl e and
you suspect you are contami nated, decontami nate.
Radi ol ogi cal contami nati on can usual l y be
removed by brushi ng or scrapi ng (use brooms or tree
branches). Water i s effecti ve for fl ushi ng away
radi ol ogi cal contami nati on. Control the runoff by
usi ng dr ai nage di tches that fl ow i nto a sump.
Remember, you have not destroyed contami nati on,
just moved i t. The runoff wi l l sti l l be hazardous.
Brushi ng or scoopi ng away the top i nch of soi l from
your fi ghti ng posi ti on wi l l al so l ower the amount of
radi ol ogi cal contami nati on.
6-10
OPERATIONAL DECON OPERATIONS
Operati onal decon general l y fol l ows i mmedi ate
decon. The objecti ve i s to r educe the l evel of
contami nati on to regenerate needed combat power.
Therefore, the uni t can sustai n i ts mi ssi on i n a
contami nated envi ronment. Operati onal decon wi l l
further reduce the ri sk of contami nati on transfer, the
spr ead of contami nati on, and the speed of the
weatheri ng process by removi ng much of the gross
contami nati on.
Decontami nate onl y what i s necessar y by
conducti ng i mmedi ate equi pment decon befor e
oper ati onal decon. Once oper ati onal decon i s
compl eted, the contami nati on hazar d on the
equi pment i s neutral i zed. So, operators spray down,
combi ned wi th oper ati onal decon, i ncr eases the
opportuni ti es to conduct unmaski ng procedures.
Operati onal decon i s accompl i shed pri mari l y by usi ng
the fol l owi ng assets currentl y i n the battal i on TOA:
M12A1 or M-17 (contai ns pump, tank ,
personnel shower assembl y, and water heater
uni ts)
M11 (fi re exti ngui sher-l i ke devi ce for sprayi ng
DS2)
M13 (brush apparatus for scrubbi ng wi th DS2)
Chemi cal agent moni tor (CAM)
I ndi vi dual chemi cal agent detector (I CAD)
Vehi cl es must be i denti fi ed as contami nated or
noncontami nated before arri vi ng at any operati onal
decon stati on. I f the contami nati on on the vehi cl e or
equi pment can be neutral i zed wi th i mmedi ate decon
pr ocedur es, decontami nate and go on wi th the
mi ssi on. To be most effecti ve, you shoul d accompl i sh
operati onal decon as soon as possi bl e.
MOPP gear exchange and vehi cl e wash down
are done i n conjuncti on. The COC establ i shes a
MOPP gear exchange si te, upwi nd of the vehi cl e
wash area. Thi s i s the si te where Seabees exchange
contami nated MOPP gear for a reserve set of MOPP
gear. The exchange i s normal l y accompl i shed by
squad-si ze el ements. Unmaski ng may or may not be
possi bl e dur i ng thi s exchange. A wel l -pr acti ced
uni t Standi ng Oper ati ng Pr ocedur e (SOP) wi l l
gr eatl y si mpl i fy and ease the car r yi ng out of
operati onal decon procedures.
PREPARATION PHASE
The preparati on stage, as i ts name i mpl i es,
i ncl udes al l of the thi ngs that must be done before any
operati onal decon can take pl ace.
Site Selection
The COC, al ong wi th the CBR offi cer, sel ects an
operati onal decon si te where l i ttl e preparati on i s
requi red and consi ders the fol l owi ng factors when
sel ecti ng a decon si te:
Good overhead conceal ment.
Good drai nage.
Off the mai n route but wi th easy access for
vehi cl es.
Wi nd di recti on.
Large enough area to handl e vehi cl e wash down
and MOPP gear exchange for a squad-si ze
el ement (100 square meters per si te).
A water source. Pl an for about 100 to 150
gal l ons of water for each vehi cl e. Of course,
l ar ger or di r ti er vehi cl es need mor e water .
NOTE: The M12A1 PDDA can carry 450 gal l ons
to a decon si te; the M17 LDS (wi th col l apsi bl e
bl adder) can hol d 1,500 gal l ons but must be setup and
fi l l ed up at the decon si te.
Site Setup
The battal i on decon crew wi l l setup the vehi cl e
washdown area. An operati onal decon si te takes
mi ni mal setup and pr epar ati on. The si te setup
requi res posi ti oni ng the M12A1 or the M17 LDS
power-dri ven decon equi pment (PDDE) al ong the
roadway, ready to di spense hot, soapy water. The
vehi cl e washdown process consi sts of contami nated
vehi cl es movi ng forward i nto a si te to be washed down
(removi ng gross contami nati on) and then movi ng out.
Addi ti onal l y, at l east two Seabees that ar e
contami nated set up a MOPP gear exchange si te.
Prepare MOPP gear exchange at a cl ean si te 50 meters
upwi nd of vehi cl e wash down. Both the vehi cl e wash
down and MOPP gear exchange operati ons shoul d
operate concurrentl y.
I f water for the M12A1 PDDE has been preheated,
preparati on for vehi cl e wash down shoul d take no
more than 10 mi nutes (thi s i s a gui del i ne). Preparati on
for vehi cl e wash down usi ng the M17 LDS wi l l take
more ti me i f the water bl adder must be fi l l ed.
6-11
EXECUTION PHASE
Thi s phase i s the actual conduct of the two
operati onal decon techni ques: the vehi cl e wash down
and the MOPP gear exchange. Compani es wi l l
provi de thei r own securi ty whi l e vehi cl e wash down
and MOPP gear exchange are i n progress.
When fi ni shed, troops mount thei r vehi cl es and
move to thei r new battl e posi ti ons. For planning
purposes, the vehicle washdown site will process
one vehicle every 2 to 3 minutes; and MOPP gear
exchange will take approximately 30 minutes.
Vehicle Wash Down
Before vehi cl e washdown, uni ts conduct the operators
spray down to i ncrease decon effecti veness. Ensure that
water pressure i s from 60 to 120 psi ; the pressure rate at
whi ch most gross contami nati on can be removed. Vehi cl e
wash down i s conducted as far forward as possi bl e and i s
done by the battal i on decon cr ew. The decon cr ew wi l l use
the power-dri ven decon equi pment (PDDE) currentl y
avai l abl e i n the TOA to conduct vehi cl e wash down, such
as the M12A1 or M17 power-dri ve decon apparatus
(PDDA). I f the mi ssi on permi ts, i t i s most effecti ve to
conduct vehi cl e wash down between 1 to 6 hours after
contami nati on. The l onger you wai t to remove or neutral i ze
contami nati on, the harder i t wi l l be to do so. Al so, the l onger
you wai t, the more opportuni ty there wi l l be for agents to
spread and make contami nati on probl ems worse.
Each vehi cl e recei ves a 2- to 3-mi nute vehi cl e
wash down wi th hot, soapy water from the PDDE.
Vehi cl e operators mai ntai n vi sual contact wi th each
other to know when to move from conceal ment to the
washdown area. The PDDE operator gi ves a si gnal
when vehi cl es are requi red to move i nto posi ti on.
Per sonnel i n wheel ed vehi cl es shoul d di smount
before wash down to avoi d getti ng wet. Fol l owi ng
thi s, the vehi cl e moves to the MOPP gear exchange
area. Troops wi l l di smount and conduct MOPP gear
exchange by squad or vehi cl e.
Dependi ng on the avai l abi l i ty of equi pment,
METT-T, and the tacti cal si tuati on, uni ts have the
opti on to sel ect a one- (tabl e 6-1 and fi g. 6-4) or a
two-l ane wash down. When usi ng two M12A1 or
other combi nati ons of decon equi pment, two-l ane
operati onal decon speeds up the process (tabl e 6-2
and fi g. 6-5). Because speed i s i mpor tant and
detecti on i s di ffi cul t, do not check vehi cl e for
contami nati on after vehi cl e
onl y gross contami nati on.
wash down. Remove
Mopp Gear Exchange
Mopp gear exchange i s done by squads or crews so
that l eaders can control the rate of overgarment
exchange. Thi s procedure al so ensures that adequate
stock s of over gar ments at company l evel ar e
mai ntai ned and accounted for. Two Seabees can work
as a buddy team, or a Seabee can execute the techni que
by hi msel f. However, when squad l eaders supervi se,
they can prevent unnecessary exchanges of MOPP
gear by usi ng the chemi cal agent moni tor (CAM).
Duri ng the MOPP gear exchange, you change your
contami nated MOPP gear for new, uncontami nated gear.
The squad or pl atoon i s responsi bl e for conducti ng i ts
own MOPP gear exchange at the assembl y area of the
operati onal decon si te. Decontami nants and chemi cal
sui t repl acements are provi ded by suppl y (S-4) and
i ssued near the decon si te.
MOPP gear exchange removes nearl y al l l i qui d or
sol i d contami nati on from you and your i ndi vi dual
equi pment. When personnel have l i ttl e, i f any, vapor
hazards on themsel ves, they may use hazard-free areas
to unmask, to eat, to dri nk, and to rest temporari l y.
Before unmaski ng and l oweri ng MOPP l evel s for
temporary rel i ef, conduct unmaski ng procedures
usi ng the CAM.
Ei ght steps are used i n MOPP gear exchange. The
squad forms a ci rcl e around a l ead team, typi cal l y the
squad l eader and another Seabee. The troops are
pai red i nto buddy teams and spaced around the
ci rcl e wi th 1 to 3 meters between teams. Members
of each team al ternate as they go through step 1
(decon gear). At steps 2 through 7, one member
compl etes al l steps wi th the assi stance from the
other team member. Rol es are then reversed. See
tabl e 6-3 for detai l ed i nstructi ons on thi s method.
These techni ques do not guarantee safe condi ti ons
requi red to al l ow unmaski ng on or near equi pment.
However, troops may move upwi nd of di rty vapor
equi pment i nto a cl ean area or col l ecti ve protecti on
shel ter, check for contami nati on, and then bri efl y
unmask. Conduct conti nuous contami nati on checks
and moni tori ng to ensure you stay i n cl ean areas. Use
the M258A1 ki t and check i t every 15 to 20 mi nutes.
Use the CAM every 5 mi nutes. Use the CAM together
wi th u n mas k i n g pr ocedu r es . Th r ee ty pes of
procedures are used for MOPP gear exchange: buddy
team, tri pl e buddy system, and i ndi vi dual MOPP gear
exchange.
6-12
Table 6-1.One-Lane Wash Down
SITE CLEARANCE PHASE vehi cl e washdown ar ea and wash the decon
Al though the operati onal decon operati on i s done
equi pment, i ncl udi ng hoses, after the operati on i s
rapi dl y wi th l i ttl e si te preparati on, these areas wi l l be
compl eted. Wet weather gear or TAP aprons shoul d
contami nated when the operati on i s compl eted. Thi s
be decontami nated wi th STB sl urry and retai ned for
coul d be a hazard to fri endl y forces reoccupyi ng the area.
future use. I f MOPP gear exchange i s done at a
di fferent l ocati on, the contami nated company wi l l be
Cleanup
requi red to cl ean up after i tsel f.
The PDDE crew of the uni t cl eanup the MOPP Marking and Reporting
gear exchange ar ea. They bur y or bur n the
contami nated r efuse and r etr i eve any unused
decontami nants. Burni ng wi l l cause a downwi nd
The PDDE crew of the battal i on marks the
vapor hazard. Burying is the preferred method of
operati onal decon si te wi th standard NBC warni ng
disposal of contaminated waste. I f you burn i t,
markers and reports the contami nated area to the COC.
The COC sends out a NBC 5 report that al ert fri endl y
noti fy the COC; the COC wi l l noti fy any uni ts that
forces to avoi d the area.
may be affected by the vapor hazard.
OPERATIONAL DECON SUMMARY
The PDDE crew must control contami nati on runoff
duri ng the executi on of operati onal decon. The PDDE For operati onal and l ogi sti cal purposes, uni ts
crew shoul d move the PDDE a few meters away from the shoul d pl an to conduct vehi cl e wash down and
6-13
Figure 6-4.One-lane wash down.
MOPP gear exchange concurrentl y. Thi s shoul d be
done between 1 to 6 hours of becomi ng contami nated.
Thi s acti on reduces degradati on and i mproves the
abi l i ty of th e u n i t to con du ct i ts mi s s i on .
Decontami nants and repl acement MOPP gear are
provi ded by the suppl y company wi th a vehi cl e near
the decon si te.
MOPP gear exchange and vehi cl e wash down are
best used by squad-si ze or pl atoon-si ze el ements.
When l arger el ements try to process through an
operati onal decon si te, they l ose many benefi ts of a
smal l decentral i zed operati on. Benefi ts of a squad- or
pl atoon-si zed decon operati on i ncl ude the fol l owi ng:
1. Tai l ored decon operati ons are fl exi bl e and
responsi ve to smal l uni t needs.
2. Smal l , speedy operati ons are more easi l y
conceal ed i n one l ocati on near the forward area.
3. A water source may not be needed at the decon
si te because most power-dri ven decon equi pment
(PDDE) have a water-carryi ng capabi l i ty to support
squad-si zed el ements.
Uni ts must devel op thei r own Standi ng Operati ng
Procedure (SOP) for obtai ni ng temporary rel i ef from
MOPP 4. The SOP i s based on each uni ts equi pment
and mi ssi on. Al though every operati on i s uni que,
methods shoul d be standardi zed when possi bl e. I n any
case, personnel must know the fol l owi ng:
6-14
Table 6-2.Two-Lane Wash Down
1. How to recogni ze and understand contani m- 4. Know how to neutral i ze or remove contami na-
ti on hazards and how to avoi d contami nati on when ti on hazards.
possi bl e.
5. Do onl y as much decon as you need to conti nue
2. How to protect yoursel f and your equi pment i f your mi ssi on.
contami nated.
The fol l owi ng sampl e checkl i st (tabl e 6-4) can be
3. Know the capabi l i ti es and l i mi tati ons of MOPP used by the battal i on decon team for pl anni ng
gear . operati onal decon operati ons:
6-15
Figure 6-5.Two-lane wash down.
6-16
Table 6-3.Mopp Gear Exchange
6-17
Table 6-4.Operational Decon Checklist.
I t i s i mportant to remember that performi ng and i s the most resource i ntensi ve. Weatheri ng causes
oper ator s spr ay down befor e hasty decon wi l l a si gni fi cant reducti on of contami nati on overti me, but
decrease the contami nati on transfer and i ncrease the
the i mmedi ate r educti on of contami nati on to
survi vabi l i ty of the crew.
negl i gi bl e r i sk l evel s does not nor mal l y occur .
THOROUGH DECON OPERATIONS
Thorough decon operati ons reduce contami nati on
to negl i gi bl e ri sk l evel s. They restore combat power
by removi ng nearl y al l contami nati on from uni t and
i ndi vi dual equi pment. Thor ough decon enabl es
troops to operate equi pment safel y for extended
per i ods at r educed MOPP l evel s. A smal l r i sk
remai ns, so peri odi c checks wi th the CAM, M8/M9
paper, or M256-seri es ki t must be made after each
operati on. After thorough decon, the uni t moves out
of the decon si te i nto a tacti cal assembl y area. The
uni t, whi l e i n thi s tacti cal assembl y, may undergo
reconsti tuti on or prepare for future operati ons.
Operati onal decon requi res fewer resources but
physi cal l y r emoves onl y sur face contami nati on.
Thorough decon i s the most effecti ve type of decon
We a t h e r con d i t i on s , a ge n t u s e d , mi s s i on
requi rements, ti me, troops, and suppl i es avai l abl e may
al l combi ne to make weatheri ng the decon opti on of
choi ce. Based on the recommendati on of the CBR
offi cer, the COC deci des whi ch type of decon i s the
most effi ci ent and effecti ve for thei r uni t.
A l i mi ti ng factor that must be consi dered when
pl anni ng any decontami nati on operati ons i s the
avai l abi l i ty of water. A typi cal vehi cl e wi l l requi re
500 gal l ons of water duri ng detai l ed equi pment decon.
I n a water-scarce envi ronment, such as deserts, the
CBR offi cer must cordi nate a water resuppl y pl an
wi th other uni ts i n the area of operati on. A water
resuppl y pl an can i ncl ude sel ecti ng a seri es of l i nk-up
poi nts al ong a route. The uni t can l i nk up wi th a bul k
water truck from other uni ts. More compl ex water
6-18
resuppl y pl ans i ncl ude l i nki ng up wi th bul k water
tr uck s, cachi ng water thr oughout the ar ea of
operati ons, coordi nati ng for the movement of water
bl adders by ai rcraft, and the i denti fi cati on of water
sources i n the area of operati on of the uni t. The use
of nonpotabl e, sal t, and bracki sh waters shoul d be
consi der ed.
The thorough decon si te consi sts of four mai n
areas: the predecon stagi ng area, the postdecon
assembl y area, the detai l ed troop decon (DTD), and
the detai l ed equi pment decon (DED). Sel ecti on of al l
four areas are based on operati onal gui dance, road
network, avai l abl e cover and conceal ment, and water
suppl y.
The pr edecon stagi ng ar ea i s used by the
contami nated uni t to r eady them for detai l ed
equi pment decon (DED) and detai l ed troop decon
(DTD) operati ons. The process at the DED i ncl udes
removi ng, neutral i zi ng, or reduci ng contami nati on on
i nter i or and exter i or sur faces of equi pment to
n egl i gi bl e r i s k . The DTD i s the pr ocess of
decontami nati ng i ndi vi dual fi ghti ng equi pment to
negl i gi bl e ri sk and removi ng contami nated MOPP
gear from the troops.
The postdecon assembl y area i s the l ocati on where
vehi cl es and troops exi ti ng the DED and DTD are l i nked.
Thi s i s done before movi ng from the decon si te.
PREDECON STAGING AREA
The contami nated uni t, by company, moves to a
predecon stagi ng area approxi matel y 250 to 500
meters downwi nd of the thorough decon si te. Here,
the contami nated uni t conducts the requi red predecon
acti ons that are desi gned to prepare the uni t for the
thorough decon operati ons. Predecon acti ons i ncl ude
the fol l owi ng:
1. Segr egate contami nated vehi cl es fr om
uncontami nated vehi cl es, i f possi bl e.
2. Al l ow vehi cl e crews to di smount and prevent
further transfer/spread of contami nati on.
3. Prepare vehi cl es for detai l ed equi pment decon.
4. Move contami nated vehi cl es and troops to the
detai l ed troop and equi pment decon l i nes.
Segregate Vehicles
Check al l vehi cl es for contami nati on, usi ng
detecti on equi pment. For chemi cal contami nati on,
use the CAM and M8 detector paper. Al so, vi sual l y
check the vehi cl es for contami nati on usi ng M9 paper.
M9 paper affi xed to vehi cl es reveal s the presence of
contami nati on and provi des an i ndi cati on of the l evel
of contami nati on (fi g. 6-6).
Figure 6-6.Contamination levels.
6-19
When usi ng the chemi cal agent moni tor (CAM),
such as the M256A1, ensure there i s suffi ci ent
di stance between vehi cl es. I f the vehi cl es are parked
too cl ose together, vapor dri ft from contami nated
vehi cl es may fal sel y i denti fy uncontami nated vehi cl es
as contami nated.
For radi ol ogi cal contami nati on, use the AN/PDR-
27-seri es or AN/PDR-43 radi ac detectors. I f the
vehi cl e onl y has i sol ated areas of contami nati on, use
a portabl e decontami nati ng apparatus (M11) to
decontami nate the chemi cal l y contami nated area.
Vehi cl es found to have no contami nati on are sent to
the reconsti tuti on assembl y area.
Crews Dismount
The vehi cl e crews, except dri vers, di smount. As
the crews di smount, they remove al l equi pment from
the top of the vehi cl es. Once crew members have
exi ted the vehi cl e, they wi l l not reenter. Thi s prevents
further contami nati on from bei ng spread i nto the
vehi cl e i nteri or.
Prepare Vehicles
The crews prepare thei r vehi cl es for processi ng
through the detai l ed equi pment decon (DED). Al l
heavy mud and debri s are removed from the vehi cl e
by the crew. The crew shoul d concentrate on the
vehi cl e undercarri age. The reason for thi s i s twofol d:
(1) contami nati on wi l l most l i kel y col l ect here and
(2) the under car r i age i s the har dest pl ace to
decontami nate. Tool s used by the crew are pl aced
back on the vehi cl e when fi ni shed.
Seat covers (when appl i cabl e), canvas i tems,
camoufl age netti ng, and any other materi al s that can
absorb l i qui d contami nati on are removed from the
vehi cl e. These i tems create a potenti al transfer hazard
and are not easi l y decontami nated. Appendi x V
pr ovi des gui dance on har d-to-decon i tems. Left
untreated, absorbed chemi cal agents wi l l desorb after
bei ng decontami nated and create a vapor hazard.
I tems that cannot be decontami nated by the standard
methods used i n detai l ed troop decon (DTD) are al so
removed and pl aced at a col l ecti on poi nt.
Move To DED and DTD
I n coordi nati on wi th the decon petty offi cer i n
charge (POI C), the contami nated uni t wi l l begi n to
send contami nated vehi cl es and personnel to the DED
and DTD. The COC has pri ori ti zed the vehi cl es for
pr ocessi ng, sendi ng the most i mpor tant fi r st.
Communi cati on i s mai ntai ned between the predecon
stagi ng area and the POI C. Al l assi stant vehi cl e
dri vers are the fi rst i ndi vi dual s sent through the DTD
to ensure there i s a dri ver exchange at stati on 3 of the
DED.
POSTDECON ASSEMBLY AREA
The company assembl es i n the postdecon
assembl y ar ea after compl eti ng DTD and DED
operati ons. The uni t occupi es thi s area before movi ng
to a reconsti tuti on l ocati on. The decon POI C wi l l
sel ect the general l ocati on. I t shoul d be bi g enough to
h ol d th e en ti r e u n i t u n d er goi n g th or ou gh
decontami nati on wi th proper cover and conceal ment.
The assembl y area shoul d be l ocated approxi matel y 1
ki l ometer upwi nd from the DED and DTD.
DETAILED TROOP DECON (DTD)
Removi ng contami nated MOPP gear, i ncl udi ng
the protecti ve mask, i s the major acti on i n detai l ed
troop decon. I f DTD i s not performed, chemi cal
agents may eventual l y penetrate the overgarment and
contami nate undercl othi ng or ski n. How l ong the
chemi cal agent wi l l take to penetrate the cl othi ng
depends on the condi ti on of the MOPP gear and the
amount of agent on the gear. I f contami nated wi th
radi ol ogi cal contami nati on, the hazard wi l l remai n
unti l removed.
The contami nated uni t i s responsi bl e for setti ng up,
operati ng, and cl osi ng the DTD i n a thorough decon si te.
The CBR offi cer recommends to the COC the general
l ocati on of the DTD wi thi n the decon si te. He or she wi l l
al so provi de the COC techni cal advi ce on the setup, the
operati on, and the cl osure of the DTD.
The DTD has ei ght stati ons. The fol l owi ng pages
di scuss acti ons at each stati on and the resources
r equi r ed.
Station 1Individual Gear Decon
Acti ons at thi s stati on remove contami nati on to a
negl i gi bl e ri sk l evel from i ndi vi dual equi pment (782
gear, mask carri er, hel met, and weapon).
PREPARATION The fol l owi ng equi pment and
suppl i es are recommended for stati on 1:
l Three 30-gal l on contai ners
l Two l ong-handl ed brushes
l Suffi ci ent supertropi cal bl each (STB) sl urry mi x
6-20
Figure 6-7.Detailed troop decon layout.
. Two ponchos or pl asti c tarps
Di g a sump 6 feet square and 4 feet deep. Pl ace
three 30-gal l on cans near the sump (fi g. 6-7).
Fi l l two cans wi th an STB sl urry mi xture. The other
can i s fi l l ed wi th cl ean water for the ri nse. Pl ace two
l ong-handl ed brushes at each can of the STB sl urry.
To prepare the sl urry, mi x 100 pounds of STB wi th
20 gal l ons of hot water. Change the mi xture after 20
troops have decontami nated thei r gear. Change the ri nse
water after every 10 troops or when i t appears di rty.
Pl ace a poncho or pl asti c tarpon the ground at the
checkpoi nt. Di vi de the poncho or tarp i n hal f, usi ng
tape. This is the contamination control line (CCL).
The checkpoi nt wi l l beat a mi ni mum of three meters
from al l other stati ons. Thi s wi l l ensure a true readi ng
on the detecti on equi pment. Pl ace the fol l owi ng
chemi cal detecti on/i denti fi cati on equi pment at the
check stati on for an average company-si zed uni t:
l One CAM
. Ei ght books of M8 chemi cal detector paper
. Four M256-seri es chemi cal agent detector ki ts
. One hundred pl asti c trash bags
Three troops are requi red to operate thi s stati on.
One supervi ses the decontami nati on of the i ndi vi dual
gear and takes the decontami nated equi pment to the
check stati on. He or she al so prepares new sl urry
mi xtures of STB as necessary. One troop remai ns at
the checkpoi nt and checks al l gear for compl eteness
of decontami nati on, usi ng the detecti on equi pment.
One troop transports the decontami nated gear to the
rei ssue stati on.
EXECUTION Decontami nate the gl oves wi th
the water or STB sl urry mi x. I f weari ng the M24,
M25A1, or M42 mask, use hot, soapy water and
sponge or STB dry mi x to decontami nate the hose and
cani ster. Decontami nate the gear by washi ng i t i n the
decontami nant contai ner and scrubbi ng the gear for 6
mi nutes. Then di p the gear i nto the ri nse water for 4
mi nutes. The stati on attendant wi l l take the gear to the
equi pment checkpoi nt. Place the decontaminated
gear on the dirty side of the contamination
control line (CCL). The moni tor checks the gear for
contami nati on usi ng the appr opr i ate detecti on
devi ces. The moni tor hol ds the detecti on devi ce 1
i nch fr om the gear and check s for r esi dual
contami nati on. I f the r esi dual contami nati on
exceeds negl i gi bl e r i sks, r ecycl e the gear and
decontami nate i t agai n. I f the gear passes the check,
pl ace i t on the clean side of the contami nati on
control l i ne. An attendant carri es the equi pment to
the rei ssue poi nt.
6-21
You must understand that the precedi ng paragraph
outl i nes the mi ni mum that shoul d be done.
Dependi ng on ti me avai l abl e, more extensi ve washi ng
and checki ng procedures may be useful . You may
deci de to wash equi pment l onger or l et i t ai r outsi de
after washi ng. Thi s further reduces the amount of
agent vapor desorbi ng (or bl eedi ng) out of the pi stol
bel t, mask carri ers, hel met covers, and so forth.
Equi pment can be put i n cl osed areas or pl asti c bags
and checked for hazardous vapors wi th CAM or
M256-seri es chemi cal agent detector ki t. The CAM
wi l l onl y detect the nerve agent (G) and bl i ster agent
vapors (H).
Station 2Overboot and Hood Decon
Acti on s at th i s s tati on n eu tr al i ze gr os s
contami nati on on overboots and l ower trouser l egs.
Gross contami nati on on the exposed parts of the
protecti ve mask i s al so decontami nated.
PREPARATI ON Prepare a shuffl e pi t by
di ggi ng a shal l ow pi t about 3 feet wi de by 3 feet l ong
by 6 i nches deep. Fi l l the shuffl e pi t wi th a
supertropi cal bl each (STB) dry mi x. Prepare the STB
dry mi x by mi xi ng 3 parts earth to 2 parts STB. Add
more STB to the mi x after ten peopl e have processed
th r ou gh th e s h u f f l e p i t. Th e f ol l ow i n g
equi pment/suppl i es are needed at thi s stati on:
c One M258A1 or M291 ski n decontami nati ng ki t
per person
l 6 feet by 6 feet pi ece of pl asti c
. Trash bags (as requi red)
l Ten drums of STB
Onl y one decon team member i s requi red to
operate thi s stati on. The buddy system i s used to
decontami nate the overboots and protecti ve mask.
EXECUTION Wal k i nto the shuffl e pi t that i s
composed of STB dry mi x (3 parts earth and 2 parts
STB). Use gl oved/protected hands to rub STB dry
mi x on the boots and l ower trousers. Decontami nate
the hood accordi ng to one of the two fol l owi ng
procedures. Use the ski n decon ki t to decontami nate
the hood and exposed parts of your buddys mask.
When you have fi ni shed decontami nati ng your
buddys mask, decontami nate your gl oves wi th the
ski n decon ki t i n preparati on for decontami nati ng your
buddys mask.
NOTE: Buddi es shoul d check each other s
overboots and overgarment for damage. Any ri ps,
tears, or punctures i n overboots, rubber gl oves, or
overgarment shoul d be reported to the attendant at
stati on 5. Thi s wi l l al l ow the attendant at stati on 5 to
check you for chemi cal agent symptoms and your
cl othi ng for possi bl e contami nati on.
Station 3Overgarment Removal
Performi ng thi s step ensures removal of the
contami nated over gar ments befor e an agent
penetrates the overgarment materi al and touches the
undergarments or ski n.
PREPARATION The materi al s and equi pment
needed at thi s stati on are as fol l ows:
. Cutti ng tool
. Two 30-gal l on garbage cans
. One hundred pl asti c bags (or at l east one per
Seabee)
. Ten boxes M258A1 or M291 decon ki ts
Thi s stati on requi res onl y one decon member. He
or she supervi ses the acti ons of the troops processi ng
through the stati on.
EXECUTION Buddy teams wi l l di vi de and
conti nue the decontami nati on process i ndi vi dual l y.
The stati on attendant assi sts i n the removal of the
smock and trouser by cutti ng them off.
CAUTION
Ensure that contami nated
trousers and smock do not fol d
the cl ean uni form.
parts of the
i n and touch
The stati on attendant cauti ons the troops not to rub
the contami nated boot agai nst hi s or her cl ean l eg and
to step wi de enough so as not to rub the cl ean l eg
agai nst the over gar ment. I f thi s step i s done
i mproperl y, the agent may be transferred to the
undercl othi ng or ski n.
Station 4Overboots and Gloves
Removal
Thi s step r emoves contami nated over boots
(footwear covers) and gl oves to l i mi t the spread of
contami nati on. Over boots and gl oves ar e al so
decontami nated for rei ssue.
6-22
PREPARATION The fol l owi ng equi pment and
materi al s are needed:
Tape
Cutti ng tool
Ei ght 30-gal l on contai ners (garbage cans)
One hundred pl asti c bags (or one per Seabee)
Two scrub brushes
Two ponchos or l arge pl asti c sheets
CAM
M8 paper
10 percent STB/HTH sol uti on
Hot, soapy water
Col d ri nse water
The stati on wi l l be setup as shown i n fi gure 6-7.
Fi l l two 30-gal l on contai ners wi th hot, soapy water
and two contai ner s wi th 10 per cent STB/HTH
sol uti on. Pl ace the two scrub brushes near the
contai ners. Fi l l two 30-gal l on contai ners wi th col d
ri nse water.
Two decon team member s ar e needed to
decontami nate the overboots and gl oves. One person
processes the overboots, whi l e the other person
processes the gl oves.
Use the tape to mark the l i qui d contami nati on
control l i ne (LCL) on the ground cl earl y. The LCL
separates the di rty from the cl ean areas. Pl ace the
cutti ng tool , two contai ners, and the pl asti c bags on
the di rty si de of the l i qui d contami nati on control
l i ne.
NOTE: An excepti on to the cl ean area i s the
contami nated gl oves. However, you must ensure no
l i qui d agent i s spi l l ed on the ground beyond the l i qui d
contami nati on l i ne.
EXECUTION The attendant unfastens or cuts
the stri ngs or el asti c cl osures on the boots. The stati on
attendant hol ds the boot whi l e the Seabee steps out and
across the control l i ne. The acti on i s repeated for the
other boot. Boots are then di scarded i n the desi gnated
contai ner by the stati on attendant. I f the boot cannot
be removed by thi s process, the attendant cuts off the
boot. The Seabee works the chemi cal protecti ve
gl oves l oose usi ng the pi nch-pul l method, and the
stati on attendant pul l s the gl oves off. The stati on
attendant di scards the gl oves i n a contai ner on the
dirty side of the control line. Stati on 4 attendant
does hi s or her duty from the di rty si de of the l i qui d
contami nati on control l i ne.
The boots and gl oves are decontami nated i n the
fol l owi ng process:
Step 1. Submerge the gl oves and boots i nto the
contai ner of hot, soapy water. Some contami nati on
wi l l be removed duri ng thi s step. When the boots and
gl oves are removed from the contai ner, ensure that no
water remai ns i nsi de the boots and gl oves. Do not
decon any item that is unserviceable.
Step 2. Submerge the boots and gl oves i nto the
contai ner of HTH sol uti on. Thoroughl y scrub the
i tems unti l no vi si bl e contami nati on remai ns. After
scrubbi ng, submerge each i tem agai n before movi ng
them i nto the ri nse contai ner.
Step 3. Thoroughl y ri nse the scrubbed i tems,
maki ng sure that the i tems are ri nsed i nsi de as wel l as
outsi de. Check al l the gl oves and boots for hol es,
tears, or punctures and di scard any that are found.
Step 4. Dry the usabl e i tems. Di scard any gl ove
or boot havi ng punctures, tears, ri ps, hol es, or other
damage i nto a pi l e. Pl ace the usabl e i tems on the
poncho or pl asti c sheet to ai r-dry and weather.
Step 5. Pl ace the i tems i nto the pl asti c trash bags,
al ong wi th an M256 detector ti cket. I f the detector
ti cket shows no contami nati on, the i tems can be
rei ssued or stored for i ssue l ater. I f the detector ti cket
shows contami nati on remai ni ng, the stati on attendants
can recycl e the i tems or di scard them.
Obvi ousl y, you cannot check for the agent on the
combat boots i f you do not remove the overboots. I f
the overboots are not properl y removed, you ri sk
contami nati ng your combat boots and spreadi ng
contami nati on to cl ean areas. I f rubber gl oves are not
properl y removed, you ri sk contami nati ng your ski n
and undercl othi ng at thi s and the fol l owi ng stati ons.
Station 5Monitor
Performi ng thi s step i denti fi es contami nati on on
per sonnel , pr ovi des spot decon capabi l i ty, and
provi des medi cal ai d, as requi red.
PREPARATION The fol l owi ng materi al s and
equi pment are needed:
Fi rst-ai d suppl i es
CAM
Fi ve packs M8 detector paper per 100 peopl e
One case M258A1 or M291 ski n decontami na-
ti ng ki ts per person
6-23
Two troops are needed to operate thi s stati on. A
corpsmen shoul d be present to treat any personnel
sufferi ng from chemi cal agents symptoms.
EXECUTI ON The moni tor check s the
i ndi vi dual s for contami nati on. Cor psmen wi l l
admi ni ster fi rst ai d as requi red. Li qui d agent can be
detected wi th the M8 detector paper. Smal l quanti ti es
of agent vapor can be detected wi th the CAM.
Symptoms of agent poi soni ng are the most obvi ous
i ndi cati on of ski n contami nati on. At thi s step, the
medi c checks each troop for symptoms and treats them
as requi red. Troops shoul d report any damage to thei r
MOPP gear that was i denti fi ed at stati ons 2, 3, and 4.
Any ar eas i denti fi ed as contami nated can be
decon tami n ated wi th th e M258A1 or M291
decontami nati ng ki t by the stati on attendants.
I ndi vi dual s wi l l be moni tored after decon. I t i s
possi bl e that al l l i qui d chemi cal contami nati on i s
absorbed i nto the cl othi ng. Chemi cal detector paper
(M8 and M9) wi l l i ndi cate negati ve, even though there
i s a hazard. The COC can choose to conduct more
extensi ve contami nati on checks her e i f ti me i s
avai l abl e. Thi s wi l l decrease the ri sk of casual ti es.
Station 6Mask Removal
Performi ng thi s step removes the mask wi thout
contami nati ng the Seabee. The mask i s taken to a
mask decon poi nt, l i mi ti ng agent transfer at the si te.
PREPARATION The fol l owi ng equi pment i s
needed:
. M8A1 automati c chemi cal agent al arm
Two troops are needed to operate thi s stati on.
They remove and carry masks to the mask decon poi nt
(stati on 7).
EXECUTION I f the hood i s sti l l attached to the
mask, the attendant pul l s the hood over the front of the
mask, grabs the mask by the voi cemi tter cover, and
pul l s the mask off the i ndi vi dual . The i ndi vi dual hol ds
hi s or her breath as the mask i s removed. I f the mask
has opti cal i nserts, the attendant hol ds the mask open
so the i ndi vi dual can remove the i nserts wi thout
touchi ng the outsi de of the mask. The i ndi vi dual then
wal k s u pwi n d 5 meter s , cr os s es th e v apor
contami nati on control l i ne, and resumes breathi ng.
The stati on attendant bri ngs the mask to stati on 7,
mask decon poi nt.
No chemi cal vapor hazard i s expected beyond the
vapor hazard contami nati on control l i ne i f the wi nd
di recti on remai ns constant. Posi ti on the M8A1 or the
M-21 automati c chemi cal agent al arm upwi nd of the
si te to warn of vapor hazards.
Station 7Mask Decon Point
Per f or mi n g th i s s tep r emov es a l l th e
contami nati on from the mask.
PREPARATION The fol l owi ng materi al and
equi pment are needed:
Four contai ners (about 3-gal l on capaci ty)
CAM (for chemi cal onl y)
Hot, soapy water
Ri nse water
Mask sani ti zi ng sol uti on
I mmersi on heater 30-gal l on contai ner
Two sponges
One case of paper towel s
Di g a sump (4 feet wi de by 4 feet l ong by 4 feet
deep) i n whi ch to di scard used fi l ters and cani sters.
Three troops are needed to operate thi s stati on.
Two troops wi l l stri p, wash, ri nse, sani ti ze, and dry
masks. The other troop checks the masks and carri es
them to the rei ssue poi nt.
EXECUTI ON Remove the eye l ens, the
outserts, and the hood, i f the hood was not cut off at
stati on 2. Remove and di scard the fi l ters or cani sters.
Put the i tems i nto the properl y marked contai ners.
Wash the mask, the hood, and the outserts i n hot, soapy
water. Ri nse them i n cl ean water, di p i nto sani ti zi ng
sol uti on, agi tate for 5 mi nutes, then ri nse i n cl ean
water agai n. Add one tube of mask sani ti zi ng sol uti on
(cal ci um hypochl ori te) to each quart of water. Wi pe
wi th rags unti l they are al most dry. Di scard each
gal l on of mask sani ti zi ng sol uti on i nto a sump after
ten masks. The attendant checks for contami nati on
wi th a CAM. I f the mask i s sti l l contami nated the
attendant r ecycl es i t for mor e decon and then
decontami nates hi s or her rubber gl oves. I f the mask
i s not contami nated, the attendant takes the
unassembl ed mask to the rei ssue poi nt. The attendant
must take care not to contami nate the rei ssue poi nt or
themsel ves.
6-24
Not properl y performi ng thi s step wi l l cause the ri sk
of contami nati ng troops when rei ssui ng masks at the
rei ssue poi nt. Even though the step i s done correctl y,
there i s sti l l a possi bl e danger when many masks are
stacked together. Smal l amounts of resi dual vapor from
each mask can become potenti al l y dangerous.
Station 8Reissue Point
Performi ng thi s step wi l l ensure that you recei ve
al l of your i ndi vi dual gear and your protecti ve mask
wi th al l the components.
PREPARATION You wi l l need the protecti ve
mask PLL parts. The uni t suppl y company and chemi cal
POI C set up the rei ssue poi nt to provi de the troops wi th
repl acement parts and assi st i n mask mai ntenance.
EXECUTI ON Rei ssue the mask wi th the
components to the troops who assembl es the mask i n
the assembl y area. I ndi vi dual s pi ck up i ndi vi dual gear
and move i t to postdecon assembl y area.
DETAILED TROOP DECON SUMMARY
Three l i nes are establ i shed when setti ng up for
detai l ed troop decon: contami nati on control l i ne
(CCL), l i qui d contami nati on l i ne (LCL), and vapor
contami nati on l i ne (VCL). I t i s cr i ti cal that
contami nati on i s mai ntai ned at each l i ne and does
not cross each l i ne. Ei ght stati ons are used for
detai l ed troop decon. Tabl e 6-5 i s a company l evel
detai l ed troop personnel and equi pment recapi tul a-
ti on for each stati on.
Table 6-5.Detailed Troop Decon Personnel and Equipment Recapitulation
6-25
DETAILED EQUIPMENT DECON (DED)
ALFA Company i s normal l y responsi bl e for the
setup, the operati on, and the cl osure of the DED
porti on of the thorough decon operati on. The COC
wi l l sel ect the DED si te. The DED for chemi cal and
bi ol ogi cal contami nati on i s compri sed of fi ve stati ons.
For radi ol ogi cal contami nati on, the DED uses al l but
stati on 2, DS Appl i cati on. Acti ons at each stati on are
descri bed bel ow. Appendi x VI i s a work/rest tabl e for
DED.
Station 1Initial Wash
The objecti ve of thi s stati on i s to remove the gross
contami nati on and di rt from the vehi cl e. The vehi cl e
i s sprayed for 2 to 3 mi nutes wi th hot, soapy water.
The vehi cl e i s then scrubbed to hel p remove caked-on
di rt. The mechani cal acti on of scrubbi ng al so hel ps
remove thi ckened chemi cal agents. Al though the
undersurface i s di ffi cul t to reach, try to remove as
much di r t as possi bl e. Thi s stati on wi l l use
approxi matel y 250 gal l ons of water per vehi cl e.
Larger vehi cl es or vehi cl es wi th l arge quanti ti es of di rt
wi l l use more water. The runoff from this station is
contaminated and must be treated as hazardous.
Thi s stati on requi res hi gh water pressure systems
(M12A1 PDDA), rather than hi gh water vol ume
systems (65-gpm pumps).
Hot, soapy water i s water heated to about 120F
to 140F to whi ch a detergent has been added. Hot
water al one i s l ess effecti ve than hot, soapy water.
Because of the hi gh temperature, some agents are best
removed by steam through vapori zati on. Fi nal l y, for
some chemi cal agents col d water exhi bi ts better
sol vent characteri sti cs.
Station 2DS2 Application
The obj ecti ve of thi s stati on i s to appl y
decontami nant to the enti re vehi cl e. The vehi cl e i s
di vi ded i nto four parts, and a member of the scrubbi ng
team i s assi gned each part of the vehi cl e. Thi s l i mi ts
the work l oad of each member of the scrubbi ng team
and avoi ds dupl i cati on of work. DS2 i s appl i ed
starti ng at the top of the vehi cl e and worki ng toward
the undercarri age. Every effort i s made to appl y DS2
to the undercarri age, especi al l y i f the vehi cl e has
crossed a contami nated area. The mop i s the l east
ti ri ng method of appl yi ng DS2. Usi ng a mop to appl y
DS2 creates a l arge amount of spi l l age. However,
conti nual use of the M13 (decon scrub brush) requi res
the scrub team to exert more energy than usi ng the
mop. I n hard-to-reach pl aces, use the M13 to appl y
DS2.
Before the start of thi s operati on, the scrub team
pours 5-gal l on cans of DS2 i nto 30-gal l on trash cans
i f mops are goi ng to be used i nstead of the M13. Each
member of the scrub team wi l l wear wet weather gear
to protect themsel ves from the DS2.
NOTE: Water adversel y affects DS2s abi l i ty to
react wi th chemi cal agents. When water i n DS2
reaches 20 percent by wei ght, the reacti on between
DS2 and the chemi cal agent stops.
I f there i s excess water remai ni ng on the vehi cl e
from stati on 1, there are several opti ons:
. Wai t for most of the water to evaporate.
l Remove the excess water.
l I ncrease the amount of DS2 appl i ed.
There must be suffi ci ent DS2 on the i tem bei ng
decontami nated for compl ete neutral i zati on to occur.
The DS2-to-agent rati o needs to be 55 to 1 for H agents
and 25 to 1 for G agents. DS2 shoul d be appl i ed wi th
scrubbi ng. Scrubbi ng i ncreases the mi xi ng of the
agent wi th DS2, especi al l y when thi ckened chemi ci al
agents are present.
Station 3Wait/Interior Decon
The objecti ve of thi s stati on i s to al l ow the DS2 to
neutral i ze the chemi cal agent and to decontami nate
the i nteri or of the vehi cl e compl etel y. Vehi cl es are
moved to a conceal ed posi ti on. Vehi cl es wi l l remai n
i n stati on 3 for no less than 30 minutes. When you
al l ow the DS2 to remai n on the contami nated surface
for 30 mi nutes, the amount of agent that wi l l l ater
desorb (off gas) wi l l be si gni fi cantl y reduced. When
there i s a 30-mi nute contact ti me, there wi l l be no
resorpti on after decon operati ons for most chemi cal
agents. However, studi es suggest that HD vapor wi l l
desorb after decon, even i f DS2 i s al l owed to remai n
for 30 mi nutes.
Whi l e the vehi cl e i s hel d i n thi s stati on for the DS2
to react compl etel y, the dri ver i nspects the i nteri or of
the vehi cl e for l i qui d contami nati on. The dri ver wi l l
be gi ven M8 detector paper. I f the dri ver i denti fi es
chemi cal contami nati on, he or she wi l l be gi ven decon
6-26
suppl i es to decontami nate the i nteri or of hi s or her
vehi cl e. The best decon sol uti on for use i n the i nteri or
of vehi cl es i s a 5 percent sol uti on of HTH or STB. The
dri ver wi pes al l reasonabl e accessi bl e surfaces wi th a
rag or sponge soaked i n the HTH or STB sol uti on. Do
not attempt to decon areas where there i s l i ttl e
l i kel i hood of contami nati on (el ectri cal assembl i es,
etc.).
CAUTION
Do not mi x HTH or STB wi th DS2. I f
mi xed, a vi ol ent reacti on wi l l occur.
Once i nteri or decon i s compl eted, the dri ver
di smounts from the vehi cl e and proceeds to the start
of the detai l ed troop decon (DTD). Havi ng compl eted
the DTD, the assi stant dri ver mounts the vehi cl e and
moves i t to the next stati on. Dri vers must exerci se
cauti on when enteri ng or exi ti ng the vehi cl e. A
DS2-coated surface i s sl i ppery and DS2 may react
wi th chemi cal protecti ve footwear. Personnel shoul d
avoi d steppi ng i n DS2 and tracki ng i t i nto the vehi cl e.
For radi ol ogi cal contami nati on, use an AN/PDR
27-seri es radi ac meter to deci de the extent and
l ocati on of contami nati on i nsi de the vehi cl e. I f there
i s contami nati on, fi gure out the i ntensi ty of the
con tami n ati on i n s i de of th e v eh i cl e. I f the
contami nati on has an intensity greater than 0.33 cGy
(the negligible risk), the i nteri or of the vehi cl e must
be decontami nated. Use hot, soapy water to wash the
contami nated areas. Use a sponge to mop up the water
and the contami nati on. Tabl e 6-6 i s a pl anni ng gui de
for decon mi xtures.
Station 4Rinse
The objecti ve of thi s stati on i s to remove the DS2
from the vehi cl e. The vehi cl e i s sprayed wi th water
fr om top to bottom. Take car e to r i nse the
undercarri age. Thi s stati on uses approxi matel y 200
gal l ons of water. Fai l ure to remove al l the DS2 from
the vehi cl e may cause fal se posi ti ve readi ngs at stati on
5. I f hi gh water pressure systems (M12A1 PDDA,
M17 LDS) are not avai l abl e, l arge vol ume water
pumps (65-gpm pumps) shoul d be used at thi s stati on.
Station 5Check
The objecti ve of thi s stati on i s to check the
compl eteness of the decon. Thi s stati on determi nes
whether the vehi cl e has a negl i gi bl e ri sk or sti l l has
si gni fi cant contami nati on r emai ni ng. Detecti on
pr ocedur es wi l l var y dependi ng on the type of
contami nati on. I f si gni fi cant contami nati on i s found
on the vehi cl e, the vehi cl e wi l l be recycl ed to stati on
2 for chemi cal contami nati on or stati on 1 for
Chemical
The CAM i s used to check for the presence of
vapor from resi dual l i qui d contami nati on. A one bar
or l ower readi ng on the CAM i ndi cates a negl i gi bl e
ri sk. Once the CAM i ndi cates the presence of vapor
contami nati on, M8 detector paper i s used to veri fy the
presence of l i qui d contami nati on. I f i t i s suspected
that both the CAM and M8 paper are produci ng a fal se
posi ti ve readi ng, use an M256 chemi cal detector ti cket
to confi rm or deny the presence of contami nati on.
Tabl e 6-7 i s a l i st of common i nterference that can
cause fal se posi ti ve readi ngs on the CAM. I f the
vehi cl e has si gni fi cant contami nati on remai ni ng,
recycl e i t.
There wi l l be desorpti on of chemi cal agents from
t h e s u r f a ce s a f t e r d e con t a mi n a t i on . On
CARC-pai nted surfaces, the desorpti on of vapors wi l l
stop sooner than al kyd-pai nted surfaces. Consi der
thi s when checki ng decontami nated i tems for overal l
decontami nati on effecti veness.
Table 6-6.Preparation of Decon Mixtures
6-27
Table 6-7.Common Interferences That Can Cause False Positive Readings on the CAM.
Radiological
Use the AN/PDR-27-ser i es to deci de i f any
contami nati on remai ns. I f there i s contami nati on
remai ni ng, determi ne the i ntensi ty of the contami nati on
i nsi de and outsi de of the vehi cl e. I f the contami nati on
has an i ntensi ty greater that 0.33 cGy (the negl i gi bl e
ri sk), the vehi cl e i s recycl ed to stati on 1.
Recycle Criteria
The COC, together wi th the CBR offi cer, wi l l
establ i sh the recycl e cri teri a before the start of decon
oper ati ons. The r ecycl e cr i ter i a deci des whi ch
vehi cl es return to stati on 1 after contami nati on i s
detected at stati on 5. I f the uni t has suffi ci ent ti me and
resources, any vehi cl e havi ng more contami nati on
than a negl i gi bl e ri sk shoul d be recycl ed. However,
ti me and resources are usual l y l i mi ted and not al l
vehi cl es can be recycl ed. The recycl e cri teri a i s based
on the weatheri ng effects.
DED Configurations
Decon teams, establ i shi ng thorough decon si tes,
may vary because of organi zati onal and equi pment
di fferences. Thi s secti on descri bes the opti mum setup
confi gurati on. The opti mum confi gurati on provi des
the maxi mum output for decon teams at 100 percent
per sonnel and equi pment. The equi pment and
p er s on n el r equ i r emen ts f or th e op ti mu m
confi gurati on are i denti fi ed for both the decon team
and supported company augments.
AL TE RNATE L AYOUT PL ANNI NG
CONSIDERATIONS. Th e CBR offi cer u s es
METT-T to determi ne the best possi bl e DED l ayout
for executi ng the mi ssi on. When deter mi ni ng
al ternate DED l ayouts, you shoul d appl y the fol l owi ng
gui del i nes:
Retai n the abi l i ty to spay hot, soapy water or
steam under pressure at stati on 1.
Stati on 2 requi res the l argest number of persons.
Experi enced and qual i fi ed CAM operators are
requi red at stati on 5.
Water does not have to be hot to ri se off DS2;
however, the l ower the water pressure, the more
water requi red for the ri nse.
DECON TEAM EQUI PPED WI TH AN
M12A1 PDDA. The opti mum setup of a DED for a
M12A1 PDDA-equi pped decon pl atoon requi res the
use of al l authori zed equi pment and personnel
(fi g. 6-8).
6-28
Figure 6-8.Optimum DED for an M12A1 PDDA-equipped layout.
6-29
Whi l e thi s DED confi gurati on i s manpower and
equi pment i ntensi ve (tabl e 6-8), i t provi des for the
rapi d decontami nati on of vehi cl es and equi pment
(ei ght vehi cl es processed per hour).
Thi s l ayout uses dual l anes at stati ons 1, 4, and 5
to process two vehi cl es at once. Si nce the most
ti me and l abor-i ntensi ve work takes pl ace at
stati on the 3, thi s stati on i s desi gned to process
three vehi cl es at a ti me. The processi ng rate of
thi s confi gurati on mi ssi on wi l l be affected by any
work/rest cycl e
.
WARNING
Work/rest tabl es are found i n appendi x
VI .Chemi cal uni t l eaders must consi der the i mpact
of the work/rest cycl e on the abi l i ty of thei r
operati on to process vehi cl es through DED.
Fai l ure to i ni ti ate a work/rest cycl e coul d resul t i n
heat casual ti es and fai l ure.
Table 6 -8 . Opt imum M1 2 A1 PDDA-Equippe d DED Se t up
6 -3 0
DECON TEAM EQUIPPED WITH AN M17
Whi l e thi s DED confi gur ati on i s manpower
LDS. Decon teams equi pped wi th the M17 LDS wi l l
.
and equi pment i ntensi ve, i t pr ovi des for the
set up the DED di fferentl y from M12A PDDA-equi pped
r a p i d d e con t a mi n a t i on of v e h i cl e s a n d
uni ts. The opti mum setup of a DED for an M17
equi pment (ei ght vehi cl es pr ocessed per hour )
LDS-equi pped pl atoon i s shown i n fi gure 6-9.
(tabl e 6-9).
Figure 6-9.Optimum DED layout for an M17 LDS-equipped unit.
6-31
Table 6-9.Optimum M17 LDS-Equipped DED Setup
Thi s l ayout uses dual l anes at stati ons 1,4, and 5
to process two vehi cl es at once. Si nce the most ti me
and l abor i ntensi ve work takes pl ace at stati on 3, thi s
stati on i s desi gned to process three vehi cl es at a ti me.
The processi ng rate of thi s confi gurati on wi l l be
affected by any work/rest cycl e.
DETAILED EQUIPMENT DECON
SUMMARY
ALFA company i s normal l y responsi bl e for the
setup, the operati on, and the cl osure of the DED
porti on of the thorough decon operati on. The COC
wi l l sel ect the DED si te. The DED for chemi cal and
bi ol ogi cal contami nati on consi sts of fi ve stati ons:
1. Stati on 1I ni ti al Wash
2. Stati on 2DS2 Appl i cati on
3. Stati on 3Wai t/I nteri or Decon
4. Stati on 4Ri nse
5. Stati on 5Check
DED confi gur ati ons may var y because of
or gani zati onal and equi pment di ffer ences. The
opti mum confi gurati on provi des the maxi mum output
for decon teams at 100 per cent per sonnel and
equi pment. The setup for a DED equi pped wi th a
M12A1 i s di fferent from one equi pped wi th a M17.
Both the DED and the DTD must be properl y cl osed
and marked. Once cl osed, an NBC 4 report must be
sent to hi gher headquarters.
6-32
CLEARING THE THOROUGH
DECON SITE
Once al l vehi cl es and per sonnel fr om the
contami nated uni t have been processed through the
thorough decon si te, the si te can be cl osed. The COC
wi l l ensure that al l contami nated el ements have been
pr ocessed.
The decon team cl oses the DED fi rst. Once the
DED i s cl osed, the decon team processes through the
DTD. After the decon team has processed through the
DTD, the DTD i s then cl osed. Once the DTD i s
cl osed, the decon team mar k s the ar ea as a
contami nated area and reports i ts exact l ocati on to the
COC. The COC i nforms hi gher headquarters usi ng an
NBC 4 report.
Closing the Detailed Equipment
Decon Area
The DED i s cl osed i n sequence, starti ng at stati on
1. Al l vehi cl es, equi pment, and nonexpendabl e
suppl i es ar e i nspected for contami nati on. I f
contami nati on i s found, i t i s decontami nated. The
acti ons at each stati on are descri bed bel ow.
. Station 1Initial Wash. Spray al l vehi cl es and
equi pment wi th hot, soapy water to remove any
contami nati on that coul d have been transferred duri ng
i ni ti al wash operati ons. Drai n the water bi l l ets or fabri c
tanks of water. I nspect al l equi pment and vehi cl es for
contami nati on, usi ng the appr opr i ate detecti on
equi pment. I f no contami nati on i s detected, l oad the
equi pment on the vehi cl es. Spread one can of STB i nto
each sump and then cover the sumps. Post NBC hazard
markers near the covered sumps.
. Station 2DS2 Application. Throw mops and
brushes used i n appl yi ng DS2 i nto a sump or bury them.
Load unused cans of DS2 and M13 DAPs on a vehi cl e.
l Station 3Wait/Interior Decon. I nspect any
unused suppl i es and equi pment for contami nati on. I f
no contami nati on i s detected, l oad the equi pment and
suppl i es on a vehi cl e. Throw contami nated suppl i es
i nto the nearest sump.
l Station 4Rinse. Spray al l vehi cl es and
equi pment wi th hot, soapy water to remove any
contami nati on that coul d have been transferred duri ng
ri nse. Drai n the water bi l l ets or fabri c tanks of water.
I nspect al l equi pment and vehi cl es for contami nati on,
usi ng the appropri ate detecti on equi pment. I f no
contami nati on i s detected, l oad the equi pment on the
vehi cl es. Spread one can of STB i nto each sump and
then cover the sumps. Post NBC hazard markers near
the covered sumps.
NOTE: Whi l e DS2 destroys the chemi cal agents,
some by-products created are al so toxi c.
. Station 5Monitor. Check al l the equi pment
for contami nati on. I f i t i s not contami nated, l oad i t on
a vehi cl e. I f i t i s contami nated, then decontami nate i t.
Throw contami nated suppl i es i nto the nearest sump.
Move al l the vehi cl es just upwi nd of stati on 5 and
i nspect them agai n for contami nati on. I f any
contami nati on i s detected, the crew wi l l use Ml 1 or
M13 DAPs to decontami nate the i denti fi ed areas.
Once the vehi cl es are decontami nated, al l personnel
wi l l proceed to the DTD.
Closing the Detailed Troop Decon Area
Once al l personnel from the DED have been
processed through the DTD, the DTD may be cl osed.
After the l ast person has exi ted the DTD, the fol l owi ng
steps for cl osi ng the DTD are as fol l ows:
. Pi ckup al l used suppl i es from stati on 7 and put
them i n the stati on 7 sump. Pi ckup the contami nati on
control l i ne. I f tape was used, di spose of i t i n stati on 7
sump.
. Move al l usabl e suppl i es and equi pment from al l
the stati ons to stati on 1. Di scard unusabl e suppl i es from
stati ons 5, 4, and 3 i nto stati on 1 sump.
. Decontami nate al l suppl i es and equi pment
col l ected at stati on 1, usi ng the decontami nant and ri nse
water at stati on 1. Empty the ri nse and decontami nant
contai ners from stati on 1 i nto the sump.
. Mar k the enti r e decon ar ea. Remove the
over gar ments usi ng the MOPP gear exchange
techni que and di spose of the overgarments i n the sump
at stati on 1.
. Move any equi pment used to fi l l the sump
upwi nd of the decon area. Decontami nate the rubber
gl oves and move al l the equi pment and suppl i es i n stati on
1 upwi nd of the decon area. Keep thi s equi pment and
suppl i es separate from that used to fi l l the sump.
. Your over boots and gl oves may now be
contami nated. Remove them. Di g a hol e and bury
them. Mark the hol e and/or area.
6-33
APPENDIX
GLOSSARY OF COMMON
I
MILITARY TERMS
AI R DEFENSEAl l defensi ve measures desi gned
to destroy attacki ng enemy ai rcraft or mi ssi l es i n
the earths envel ope of atmosphere or to nul l i fy or
reduce the effecti veness of such attack.
AREA OF OPERATI ONS (AO)That porti on of an
area of war necessary for mi l i tary operati ons and
for the admi ni strati on of such operati ons.
AREA OF RESPONSI BI LI TY (AOR)A defi ned
area of l and i n whi ch responsi bi l i ty i s speci fi cal l y
assi gned to the commander of the area for the
devel opment and mai ntenance of i nstal l ati ons, the
control of movement, and the conduct of tacti cal
op er a ti on s i n v ol v i n g tr oop s u n d er th e
commander s contr ol , al ong wi th par al l el
authori ty to exerci se these functi ons.
ARMORED PERSONNEL CARRI ER (APC)A
l i ghtl y ar mor ed, hi ghl y mobi l e, ful l -tr acked
vehi cl e, amphi bi ous and ai r -dr oppabl e, used
pri mari l y for transporti ng personnel and thei r
i ndi vi dual equi pment duri ng ti wti cal operati ons.
Producti on modi fi cati ons or appl i cati on of speci al
ki ts permi t use as a mortar carri er, a command
post, a fl ame thrower, an anti ai rcraft arti l l ery
chassi s, or a l i mi ted recovery vehi cl e.
AVENUE OF APPROACHAn ai r or ground route
of attacki ng forces of a gi ven si ze l eadi ng to i ts
objecti ve or key terrai n i n i ts path.
AVI ATI ON COMBAT ELEMENT (ACE)One of
the four el ements of a Mari ne Ai r-Ground Task
Force (MAGTF). The Avi ati on Combat El ement
(ACE) i s task-ori ented to provi de al l or a porti on
of the functi ons of Mari ne Corps avi ati on i n
varyi ng degrees based on the tacti cal si tuati on and
the MAGTF mi ssi on and si ze. These functi ons
are ai r reconnai ssance, anti ai r warfare, assaul t
support, offensi ve ai r support, el ectroni c warfare,
and control of ai rcraft and mi ssi l es. The ACE i s
organi zed around an avi ati on headquarters and
vari es i n si ze from a composi te ai rcraft squadron
to one or more ai rcraft wi ng(s). I t i ncl udes the
av i ati on comman d (i n cl u di n g ai r con tr ol
agenci es), combat, combat support, and combat
servi ce support uni ts requi red by the si tuati on.
Normal l y, there i s onl y one ACE i n a MAGTF.
BARRI ERA coor di nated ser i es of obstacl es
desi gned or used to channel , di rect, restri ct, del ay,
or stop the movement of an opposi ng force and to
i mpose addi ti onal l osses i n personnel , ti me, and
equi pment on the opposi ng force. Barri ers can
exi st natural l y, be man-made, or a combi nati on of
both.
BASBattal i on ai d stati on.
BASEAn area or l ocal i ty contai ni ng i nstal l ati ons
that provi de l ogi sti c or other support.
BRI G ADE S E RVI CE S U PPORT G ROU P
(BSSG)The BSSG i s the task -or gani zed
combat servi ce support el ement of the Mari ne
amphi bi ous br i gade (MAB). Per sonnel and
equi pment are assi gned to the BSSG from the
permanent battal i ons of the force servi ce support
group. As requi red, i t may be augmented by
combat servi ce support el ements from the di vi si on
or ai r wi ng.
CASUALTY STATUSA term used to cl assi fy a
casual ty for reporti ng purposes. There are seven
casual ty statuses: (1) deceased, (2) duty status -
whereabouts unknown, (3) mi ssi ng, (4) very
seri ousl y i l l or i njured, (5) seri ousl y i l l or i njured,
(6) i ncapaci tati ng i l l ness or i njury, and (7) not
seri ousl y i njured.
COMBAT SERVI CE SUPPORT DETACHMENT
(CSSD)A ta s k or ga n i za ti on f r om a n y
combi nati on of combat servi ce support resources.
I t mayor may not be part of a MAGTF, dependent
upon the si tuati on. For exampl e, i t coul d be
formed to augment the organi c capabi l i ty of a
r ei nfor ced i nfantr y battal i on conducti ng an
i ndependent operati on or to support a squadron
l ocated at a remote ai rfi el d. The command and
control el ement wi l l normal l y be provi ded by the
force servi ce support group.
COMBAT SE RVI CE SU PPORT E L E ME NT
(CSSE)One of the four el ements of a Mari ne
Ai r -Gr ou n d Tas k For ce (MAGTF). I t i s
task-organi zed to provi de the ful l range of combat
servi ce support necessary to accompl i sh the
MAGTF mi ssi on. The CSSE can provi de suppl y,
AI-l
mai ntenance, transportati on, del i berate engi neer,
heal th, postal , di sbur si ng, pr i soner of war ,
automated i nformati on systems, and exchange.
The CSSE vari es i n si ze from a MAU servi ce
support group (MSSG) to a force servi ce support
gr oup (FSSG). Nor mal l y, ther e i s onl y one
Combat Servi ce Support El ement i n a MAGTF.
COMBAT SERVI CE SUPPORT OPERATI ON
CENTER (CSSOC)The agency that control s
and coordi nates the day-to-day operati ons of the
combat support el ements.
COMBAT SUPPORT ELEMENTS (CSE)Those
el ements whose pri mary mi ssi ons are to provi de
combat support to the combat forces and whi ch
are a part, or prepared to become a part, of a
theater , command, or task for ce for med for
combat operati ons.
COMMAND AND CONTROLThe exer ci se of
authori ty and di recti on by a properl y desi gnated
comman der ov er as s i gn ed for ces i n th e
accompl i shment of the mi ssi on. Command and
contr ol functi ons ar e per for med thr ough an
a r r a n gemen t of p er s on n el , equ i p men t,
communi cati ons, faci l i ti es, and procedures used
by a comman der i n pl an n i n g, di r ecti n g,
coor di n ati n g, an d con tr ol l i n g for ces an d
operati ons i n the accompl i shment of the mi ssi on.
COMMAND ELEMENT (CSE)One of the four
el ements of a Mari ne Ai r-Ground Task Force
(MAGTF). I t i s the MAGTF headquarters. The
Command El ement i s a permanent organi zati on
composed of the commander, the general or
ex ecu ti v e an d s peci al s taff s ecti on s , th e
headquarters secti on, and requi si te communi ca-
ti ons and servi ce support faci l i ti es. The command
el emen t pr ov i des comman d, con tr ol , an d
coordi nati on essenti al for effecti ve pl anni ng and
executi on of operati ons by the Avi ati on Combat
El ement (ACE), the Ground Combat El ement
(GCE), and the Combat Servi ce Support El ement
(CSSE). There i s onl y one command el ement i n
a MAGTF.
CONTAMI NATI ONTh e d ep os i t an d/or
absorpti on of radi oacti ve materi al or bi ol ogi cal or
chemi cal agents on and by structures, areas,
personnel , or objects.
CONVOY ESCORTAn escort to protect a convoy
of vehi cl es from bei ng scattered, destroyed, or
captur ed.
DEAD SPACEAn area wi thi n the maxi mum range
of a weapon, a radar, or an observer that cannot be
covered by fi re or observati on from a parti cul ar
posi ti on because of i nterveni ng obstacl es, the
nature of the ground, the characteri sti cs of the
trajectory, or the l i mi tati ons of the poi nti ng
capabi l i ti es of the weapons.
DECONTAMI NATI ONThe r emoval or neutr a-
l i zati on of hazar dous l evel s of chemi cal ,
bi ol ogi cal or radi ol ogi cal contami nati on from
personnel and materi al .
DEFENSE AREAFor any parti cul ar command, the
area extendi ng from the forward edge of the battl e
area to i ts rear boundary. I t i s here that the
deci si ve defensi ve battl e i s fought.
DEFENSE I N DEPTHThe si ti ng of mutual l y
supporti ng defense posi ti ons desi gned to absorb
and progressi vel y weaken attack, to prevent i ni ti al
observati ons of the whol e posi ti on by the enemy,
and to al l ow the commander to maneuver hi s
reserve.
DETAI LED EQUI PMENT DECONPr ocess of
r emovi ng or neutr al i zi ng contami nati on on
i nteri or and exteri or surfaces of uni t equi pment to
negl i gi bl e r i sk l evel s to al l ow MOPP l evel
reducti on for extended peri ods.
DETAI LED TROOP DECONProcess of
decontami nati ng i ndi vi dual fi ghti ng equi pment to
negl i gi bl e ri sk l evel s; removi ng contami nated
MOPP gear i n cl u di n g pr otecti v e mas k s ;
decon tami n ati n g pr otecti v e mas k s ; an d
moni tor i ng per sonnel equi pment for decon
effecti veness. Thi s i s done to reduce MOPP l evel s
for extended peri ods.
F I N A L PR OTE C TI V E F I R E (F PF )A n
i mmedi atel y avai l abl e prearranged barri er of fi re
desi gned to i mpede enemy movement across
defensi ve l i nes or areas.
FI RE PLANA tacti cal pl an for usi ng the weapons
of a uni t or formati on so that thei r fi re wi l l be
coor di nated.
FI REPOWERThe amount of fi re whi ch may be
del i vered by a posi ti on, a uni t, or a weapon
system.
AI-2
F OR C E S E R V I C E S U P P OR T G R OU P
(FSSG)The FSSG i s a permanentl y structured
organi zati on whose mi ssi on i s to provi de CSS for
the Mar i ne amphi bi ous for ce (MAF). I t i s
desi gned to support one di vi si on and one ai r wi ng.
I f supporti ng a force of greater si ze, addi ti onal
assets are necessary to augment i ts capabi l i ti es.
GROUND COMBAT ELEMENT (GCE)One of
the four el ements of a Mari ne Ai r-Ground Task
Force (MAGTF). I t i s task-organi zed to conduct
ground operati ons. The GCE i s constructed
around an i nfantry uni t and vari es i n si ze from a
rei nforced i nfantry battal i on to one or more
rei nforced Mari ne di vi si on(s). The GCE al so
i ncl udes appropri ate combat support and combat
servi ce support uni ts. Normal l y, there i s onl y one
Ground Combat El ement i n a MAGTF. Al though
permanentl y structured wi th ei ght functi onal
battal i ons, task or gani zati ons fr om those
battal i on s wou l d n or mal l y s u ppor t MAF
operati ons over a wi de geographi c area.
H A S TY DE C ON OPE R A TI ON A d e c on
operati on that consi sts of two techni ques, the
MOPP gear exchange and the vehi cl e wash down.
HELI COPTER LANDI NG SI TEA desi gnated
subdi vi si on of a hel i copter l andi ng zone i n whi ch
a si ngl e fl i ght or wave of assaul t hel i copters l and
to embark or di sembark troops and/or cargo.
H E L I COPTE R L ANDI NG ZONE (H L Z)A
speci fi ed gr ound ar ea for l andi ng assaul t
hel i copters to embark or di sembark troops and/or
cargo. A l andi ng zone may contai n one or more
l andi ng si tes.
HOT LI NEA real or i magi nary l i ne that separates
contami nated from uncontami nated areas.
I NTELLI GENCE(1) The product resul ti ng from
the col l ecti on, processi ng, i ntegrati on, anal ysi s,
eval uati on, and i nter pr etati on of avai l abl e
i nformati on concerni ng forei gn countri es or areas
and (2) the i nformati on and knowl edge about an
adv er s ar y obtai n ed th r ou gh obs er v ati on ,
i nvesti gati on, anal ysi s, or understandi ng.
KEY TERRAI NAny l ocal i ty, or area the sei zure
or retenti on of whi ch affords a marked advantage
to ei ther combatant.
KI LLI NG ZONEAn area i n whi ch a commander
pl ans to force the enemy to concentrate so as to
destroy hi m wi th conventi onal weapons or the
tacti cal empl oyment of nucl ear weapons.
LANDI NG ZONE (LZ)Any speci fi ed zone used
for the l andi ng of ai rcraft.
MAI N BATTL E AREATh at por ti on of th e
battl efi el d i n whi ch the deci si ve battl e i s fought to
defeat the enemy. For any parti cul ar command,
the mai n battl e area extends rearward from the
forward edge of the battl e area to the rear
boundary of the commands subordi nate uni ts.
MA R I N E A I R - G R OU N D TA S K F OR C E
(MAGTF)A Mari ne Ai r-Ground Task Force i s
a task organi zati on of Mari ne forces (di vi si on,
ai rcraft wi ng, and servi ce support groups) under a
si ngl e command and structured to accompl i sh a
speci fi c mi ssi on. The Mari ne Ai r-Ground Task
For ce compon en ts wi l l n or mal l y i n cl u de
command, ground combat, avi ati on combat, and
combat servi ce support el ements (i ncl udi ng Navy
Support El ements).
MARI NE AI RCRAFT GROU P (MAG)Th e
MAG i s usual l y admi ni strati vel y and tacti cal l y
structured by ai rcraft category as bei ng ei ther a
h el i copter gr ou p or a fi x ed-wi n g gr ou p.
Composi te MAGs may al so be formed for speci fi c
mi ssi ons or uni que organi zati onal /geographi c
consi derati ons. Each MAG has a headquarters
and mai ntenance squadron (H&MS). Wi th a
source of suppl y, the MAG i s the smal l est avi ati on
uni t capabl e of sel f-sustai ni ng i ndependent
operati ons.
MARI NE AI RCRAFT WI NG (MAW)The MAW
i s the hi ghest l evel avi ati on command i n the Fl eet
Mari ne Force (FMF). Each wi ng i s capabl e of
supporti ng one Mari ne di vi si on. The MAW i s
task-organi zed to provi de a fl exi bl e and bal anced
ai r combat organi zati on capabl e of provi di ng the
ful l range of combat ai r operati ons i n a vari ety of
areas wi thout the requi rement of preposi ti oned
support, control , and l ogi sti cs faci l i ti es. Onl y the
wi ng has the i nherent capabi l i ty of performi ng al l
si x avi ati on functi ons.
MA R I N E E X PE DI TI ON A R Y B R I G A DE
(MEB)A task organi zati on whi ch i s normal l y
bui l t ar ound a r egi mental l andi ng team, a
previ si onal Mari ne ai rcraft group, and a l ogi sti cs
suppor t gr oup. I t i s capabl e of conducti ng
amphi bi ous assaul t operati ons of a l i mi ted scope.
Duri ng potenti al cri si s si tuati ons, a Mari ne
Expedi ti onary Bri gade may be forward depl oyed
afl oat for an extended per i od i n or der to pr ovi de
an i mmedi ate combat response.
AI-3
MARI NE EXPEDI TI ONARY FORCE (MEF)
The Mari ne Expedi ti onary Force, the l argest of the
Mari ne ai r/ground task forces, i s normal l y bui l t
around a di vi si on/wi ng team, but can i ncl ude
several di vi si ons and ai rcraft wi ngs, together wi th
a n a p p r op r i a te comba t s er v i ce s u p p or t
organi zati on. The Mari ne expedi ti onary force i s
capabl e of conducti ng a wi de range of amphi bi ous
assaul t operati ons and sustai ned operati ons
ashore. I t can be tai l ored for a wi de vari ety of
combat mi ssi ons i n any geographi c envi ronment.
MARI NE EXPEDI TI ONARY UNI T (MEU)A
task organi zati on whi ch i s normal l y bui l t around
a battal i on l andi ng team, rei nforced hel i copter
squadron, and l ogi sti c support uni t. I t ful fi l l s
routi ne forward afl oat depl oyment requi rements,
provi des an i mmedi ate reacti on capabi l i ty for
cri si s si tuati ons, and i s capabl e of rel ati vel y
l i mi ted combat operati ons.
MARI NE EXPEDI TI ONARY UNI T (SPECI AL
OPE RATI ONS CAPABL E )A f or wa r d-
depl oyed, embarked U.S. Mari ne Corps uni t wi th
enhanced capabi l i ty to conduct speci al operati ons.
The Mari ne expedi ti onary uni t (speci al operati ons
capabl e) i s ori ented toward amphi bi ous rai ds, at
ni ght, under l i mi ted vi si bi l i ty, whi l e empl oyi ng
emi ssi on contr ol pr ocedur es. The Mar i ne
expedi ti onary uni t (speci al operati ons capabl e) i s
not a Secretary of Defense-desi gnated speci al
oper ati ons for ce but, when di r ected by the
Nati onal Command Authori ti es and/or the theater
commander, may conduct hostage recovery or
oth er s peci al oper ati on s u n der ex tr eme
ci rcumstances when desi gnated speci al operati ons
forces are not avai l abl e. Al so cal l ed MEU (SOC).
MAR I N E WI N G S U PPORT G R OU P
(MWSG)An admi ni str ati ve command that
provi des al l essenti al avi ati on ground support
(AGS) requi rements for el ements of the MAW.
The MWSG i s capabl e of suppor ti ng two
fi xed-wi ng and two rotary-wi ng ai rfi el ds per
MAW.
MAU SERVI CE SUPPORT GROUP (MSSG)A
task-organi zed combat servi ce support el ement of
the Mari ne amphi bi ous uni t (MAU). Li ke the
BSSG, i t draws personnel and equi pment from the
permanent battal i ons of the force servi ce support
group. As requi red, i t may be augmented by
combat servi ce support el ements from the di vi si on
or ai rcraft wi ng.
MI S S I ON ORI E N TE D PR OTE C TI V E
POSTUREA fl exi bl e system for pr otecti on
agai nst NBC contami nati on. Thi s postur e
requi res personnel to wear onl y that protecti ve
cl othi ng and equi pment (MOPP gear) appropri ate
to the threat, work rate i mposed by the mi ssi on,
temperature, and humi di ty. There are fi ve l evel s
of MOPP (zero through 4). MOPP 4 offers the
most pr otecti on but al so degr ades mi ssi on
performance the most.
MOPP GEARCombat cl othi ng and equi pment
used to operate i n an NBC envi ronment.
MOPP G E A R E X C H A N G E Pr oc e s s of
decontami nati ng i ndi vi dual fi ghti ng equi pment,
i ncl udi ng the protecti ve mask and hood, removi ng
the contami nated MOPP gear, and putti ng on new
MOPP gear.
N E G L I G I BL E RI S K L E VE L S L e v e l s of
contami nati on that wi l l cause mi l d i ncapaci tati on
among no more than 5 percent (for chemi cal and
bi ol ogi cal contami nati on; 2.5 percent nui sance
effect for r adi ol ogi cal contami nati on) of the
unprotected troops who operate for 12 conti nuous
hours wi thi n 1 meter of a contami nated surface.
OPE RATI ONAL CONTROL (OPCON)Th e
authori ty del egated to a commander to perform
those functi ons of command over subordi nate
forces i nvol vi ng the composi ti on of subordi nate
forces, the assi gnment of tasks, the desi gnati on of
objecti ves, and the author i tati ve di r ecti on
necessary to accompl i sh the mi ssi on. Operati onal
control i ncl udes di recti ve authori ty for joi nt
trai ni ng. Operati onal control shoul d be exerci sed
through the commanders of assi gned normal
organi zati onal uni ts or through the commanders
of subor di nate for ces establ i shed by the
commander exer ci si ng oper ati onal contr ol .
Oper ati onal contr ol nor mal l y pr ovi des ful l
authori ty to organi ze forces as the operati onal
commander deems necessar y to accompl i sh
assi gned mi ssi ons and to retai n or del egate
oper ati onal contr ol or tacti cal contr ol as
necessary. Operati onal control may be l i mi ted by
functi on, ti me, or l ocati on. I t does not, of i tsel f,
i ncl ude such matters as admi ni strati on, di sci pl i ne,
i nternal organi zati on, and uni t trai ni ng.
OPE RATORS SPRAY DOWN Pr oce s s of
appl yi ng decontami nant onto uni t equi pment
control surfaces to stop contami nati on from
soaki ng i nto surfaces.
AI-4
PARTI AL DECONTAMI NATI ONThe r emoval
or neutral i zati on of al l vi si bl e or detectabl e
contami nati on fr om i ndi vi dual cl othi ng and
equi pment and from those surfaces of equi pment
that operators or crew members must contact to
perform thei r mi ssi on-vehi cl e entry and exi t
r outes.
PASSI VE AI R DEFENSEAl l measures, other than
acti ve ai r defense, tak en to mi ni mi ze the
effecti veness of hosti l e ai r acti on. These measures
i n cl u d e d ecep ti on , d i s p er s i on , a n d u s e
of protecti ve constructi on.
PASSI VE DEFENSEMeasures taken to reduce the
probabi l i ty of and to mi ni mi ze the effects of
damage caused by hosti l e acti on wi thout the
i ntenti on of taki ng the i ni ti ati ve.
PERSONAL WI PE DOWNProcess of removi ng
or n eu tr al i zi n g con tami n ati on fr om th e
i ndi vi dual s equi pment i ncl udi ng the protecti ve
mask, hood, gl oves, ri fl e, and hel met to stop
contami nati on spread and to stop contami nati on
from penetrati ng i nto equi pment surfaces.
PHYSI CAL SECURI TYThat par t of secur i ty
concerned wi th physi cal measures desi gned to
safeguard personnel ; to prevent unauthori zed
access to equi pment, i nstal l ati ons, materi al , and
documents; and to safeguar d them agai nst
espi onage, sabotage, damage, and theft.
POWER-DRI VEN DECON EQUI PMENTAny
of several di fferent ki nds of pump and heater uni ts
capabl e of sprayi ng heated water or steam. Soap
and decontami nants can al so be mi xed and
sprayed through these uni ts i n most cases, such as
the M12 power-dri ven decon apparatus and the
XM17 SANATOR l i ghtwei ght decon system.
PR OV I S I ON A L MOB I L E S E CU RI TY
PLATOON (PMSP)Uni t of the pr ovi si onal
securi ty forces whi ch provi des the rear area
secur i ty coor di nator wi th a qui ck r eacti on
capabi l i ty i n support of the RAS mi ssi on.
PR OV I S I ON A L S E CU RI TY F OR C E S
(PSF)Uni ts avai l abl e to the rear area securi ty
coor di nator for suppl ementi ng l ocal defense
efforts and to gi ve assi stance to the mi l i tary pol i ce
i n the performance of RAS mi ssi ons.
PYROTECHNI CA mi xtur e of chemi cal s whi ch
when i gni ted i s capabl e of reacti ng exothermi cal l y
to produce l i ght, heat, smoke, sound or gas, and
may al so be used to i ntroduce a del ay.
R E A R A R E A OP E R A TI ON S C E N TE R
(RAOC)The agency responsi bl e for pl anni ng,
coordi nati ng, di recti ng, and moni tori ng rear area
securi ty.
REAR AREA SECURI TY (RAS)The measur es
taken before, duri ng, and/or after an enemy
ai rborne attack, sabotage acti on, i nfi l trati on,
guerri l l a acti on, and/or i ni ti ati on of psychol ogi cal
or propaganda warfare to mi ni mi ze the effects
ther eof.
RE AR ARE A SE CU RI TY COORDI N ATOR
(RASC)That person responsi bl e for pl anni ng,
coordi nati ng, and di recti ng the RAS effort. The
RASC i s usual l y the CSSE commander but can be
the ACE commander.
RECONSTI TUTI ONTh e r est, r efi tti n g,
mai ntenance, and r epl acement necessar y to
restore a mi l i tary uni t to i ts ful l capabi l i ty, often
after i t has been depl eted by mi l i tary operati ons.
RATE OF FI REThe number of rounds fi red per
weapon per mi nute.
RATE OF MARCHThe average number of mi l es
or ki l ometers to be travel l ed i n a gi ven peri od of
ti me, i ncl udi ng al l ordered hal ts. I t i s expressed
i n mi l es or ki l ometers i n the hour.
S K I N DE CON TE CH N I QU E Pr oce s s of
removi ng or neutral i zi ng contami nati on on the
ski n wi thi n 1 mi nute of contami nati on to prevent
i t from penetrati ng i nto ski n.
SI TUATI ON MAPA map showi ng the tacti cal or
the admi ni strati ve si tuati on at a parti cul ar ti me.
SI TUATI ON REPORT (SI TREP)A report gi vi ng
the si tuati on i n the area of a reporti ng uni t or
formati on.
SMALL ARMSMan por tabl e, i ndi vi dual , and
crew-served weapon systems used mai nl y agai nst
personnel and l i ghtl y armored or unarmored
equi pment.
SPOT REPORTA conci se nar r ati ve r epor t of
es s en ti al i n for mati on cov er i n g ev en ts or
condi ti ons that may have an i mmedi ate and
si gni fi cant effect on cur r ent pl anni ng and
operati ons that i s afforded the most expedi ti ous
means of transmi ssi on consi stent wi th requi si te
securi ty.
AI-5
S TA N DI N G OPE R A TI N G PR OC E DU R E
(SOP)A set of i nstr ucti ons cover i ng those
features of operati ons whi ch l end themsel ves to a
defi ni te or standardi zed procedure wi thout l oss of
effecti veness. The procedure i s appl i cabl e unl ess
ordered otherwi se.
TABLE OF ALLOWANCE (TOA)An equi pment
al l owance document whi ch pr escr i bes basi c
al l owances of or gani zati onal equi pment and
provi des the control to devel op, revi se, or change
equi pment authori zati on i nventory data.
TACTI CS(1) The empl oyment of uni ts i n combat
and (2) the ordered arrangement and maneuver of
uni ts i n rel ati on to each other and/or to the enemy
i n order to use thei r ful l potenti al i ti es.
TAP APRONToxi col ogi cal agent protecti ve apron.
TARGET OF OPPORTUNI TYA target vi si bl e to
a surface of ai r sensor or observer whi ch i s wi thi n
range of avai l abl e weapons and agai nst whi ch fi re
has not been schedul ed or requested.
TERRAI N ANALYSI SThe col l ecti on, anal ysi s,
eval uati on, and i nterpretati on of geographi c
i nformati on on the natural and man-made features
of the terrai n, combi ned wi th other rel evant
factors, to predi ct the effect of the terrai n on
mi l i tary operati ons.
VEHI CLE WASH DOWNPr ocess of fl ushi ng
contami nati on off equi pment surfaces to l i mi t
spread, reduce overal l amounts of contami nati on,
and speed weatheri ng.
AI-6
APPENDIX II
OVERLAY TECHNIQUES
1. GENERAL
Overl ays provi de a rapi d and easi l y understood means by whi ch the
commander or hi s staff may express an operati onal pl an, concept, or fri endl y or
enemy si tuati on. Standardi zati on of techni que i s essenti al i f tacti cal i nformati on
i s to be rel ayed wi thout mi sunderstandi ng. Gui del i nes for the pi ctori al
representati on of tacti cal si tuati ons are establ i shed i n thi s appendi x.
2. MI LI TARY SYMBOLS
a. Col ors.Col ors i n conjuncti on wi th mi l i tary symbol s denote the
fol l owi ng:
(1) Bl ue or Bl ack.Fri endl y uni ts and acti vi ti es.
(2) Red. Enemy uni ts and acti vi ti es. I f thi s col or i s not avai l abl e,
enemy symbol s are outl i ned wi th doubl e bl ack l i nes.
(3) Yel l ow.Fri endl y or enemy areas of chemi cal , bi ol ogi cal , or
(4) Green.Man-made obstacl es.
b. Uni ts and I nstal l ati ons
(1) Geometri c fi gures form the basi c symbol s to represent uni ts and
i nstal l ati ons. Future or proposed l ocati ons of uni ts or i nstal l ati ons are shown by
broken l i nes. Exampl es of the more common fi gures areas fol l ows:
(2) To show the si ze of a uni t, the appropri ate si ze i ndi cati on i s
pl aced on top of the basi c symbol s as fol l ows:
AII-1
(3) To showthe type uni t bei ng represented, a symbol i s pl aced i nsi de the
basi c fi gure as fol l ows:
(4) To i ndi cate a parti cul ar uni t or i nstal l ati on, pl ace the uni ts own
desi gnati on (i n accordance wi th i ts si ze symbol ) to the l eft of the symbol wi th
hi gher echel ons of command to the ri ght of the symbol . Sl ashes separate
command echel ons. To avoi d cl utteri ng the symbol , known uni ts i n the chai n of
command may be omi tted.
c. Wea p on s
(1) Symbol s are al so used to i ndi cate the type and l ocati on of a weapon or
group of weapons. When a weapon symbol appears on a map or overl ay, the base
of the shaft i ndi cates the l ocati on of the weapon.
(2) Most weapons are deri ved from the fol l owi ng basi c symbol s:
AII-2
(a) I f the weapon has a hi gh trajectory, a i s pl aced at the base of the
weapon.
(b) A weapon whi ch i s a fl at trajectory, anti tank weapon has a pl aced
at the base of the shaft.
(c) I f the weapon i s pri mari l y for ai r defense, a i s pl aced at the base
of the shaft.
(d) A weapon whi ch i s a rocket projector or l auncher has a pl aced
at the head of the shaft.
(e) I f the weapon i s al so a tracked, sel f-propel l ed vehi cl e, a i s pl aced
bel ow the weapon symbol .
(3) General l y, the number and cal i ber of weapons are i ndi cated by pl aci ng the
number of weapons to the l eft of the symbol and the cal i ber to the ri ght of the
symbol .
3. CONTROL MEASURES
a. Li nes of control or coordi nati on are drawn and l abel ed as shown bel ow:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Fi re support coordi nati on l i ne
Restri cti ve fi re l i ne
Li ght l i ne
Li ne of departure
Li ne of departure i s present
posi ti ons
Li ne of departure i s forward
fri endl y di sposi ti ons
Phase l i ne wi th code name
AII-3
(8)
(9)
Coordi nated fi re l i ne
Probabl e l i ne of depl oyment
(10) Fi nal coordi nati on l i ne
b. Control poi nts are drawn on the sel ected terrai n feature and i denti fi ed as
fol l ows:
(1) A checkpoi nt consi sts of a ci rcl e encl osi ng a sel ected terrai n feature
wi th a number, l etter, or code name pl aced i nsi de the ci rcl e.
(2) A coordi nati ng poi nt i s shown by drawi ng a ci rcl e on the sel ected
terrai n feature and pl aci ng an X i n the center. Coordi nati ng poi nts are used i n
conjuncti on wi th boundari es to desi gnate defensi ve areas.
(3) A contact poi nt i s shown by drawi ng a square wi th a number pl aced
i nsi de.
4. FI RE PLANS
a. Sector of Fi re
(1) Representati on of a sector of fi re i s shown by two arrows composed
of broken l i nes:
(2) A weapon symbol i s normal l y used i n conjuncti on wi th the symbol
for a sector of fi re. The base of the symbol i ndi cates the weapons posi ti on.
AII-4
b. Di recti on of Fi re
(1) A pri nci pal di recti on of fi re i s represented by a sol i d arrow. To prevent
confusi on wi th si mi l ar symbol s, the symbol representi ng a pri nci pal di recti on of
fi re i s al ways shown together wi th the appropri ate weapon symbol .
(2) Symbol s for sectors of fi re and pri nci pal di recti ons of fi re are often
combi ned.
(3) A speci al pri nci pal di recti on of fi re symbol i s used to i ndi cate fi nal
protecti ve l i nes. Heavi l y shaded porti ons al ong the pri nci pal di recti on of fi re
symbol i ndi cate areas of grazi ng fi re.
T
he fi nal protecti ve l i ne symbol i s usual l y combi ned wi th the sector of fi re and
weapon symbol s.
c. Tar gets
(1) Poi nt targets of l ess than 100 yards
(2) Li near targets
AII-5
(3) Area targets
(4) Rectangul ar targets
d. Fi nal Protecti ve Fi re
AII-6
APPENDIX III
CHARACTERISTICS OF TOA WEAPONS
FOR AN NMCB
WEAPON AI R DET AI R ECH MAX EFFECTI VE RATE OF FI RE RDS
TOA TOA RANGE/ PER MI NUTE
METERS
Mortar 60MM M224 2 4 3,490 Sustai ned 15
Rapi d 30
M16A2E3 76 574 800 Semi 45 Auto 90
Gr enade Launcher 6 42 Area Target 350 X
M203 Poi nt Target 150
Pi stol .45 Cal 20 155 45 Sustai ned 10
M1911A1 Rapi d 21-28
Shotgun M870 3 21 45 X
Machi ne Gun 50 2 4 1,830 Sustai ned 40 or l ess
Cal M2 Rapi d more than 40
Machi ne Gun 40MM 2 4 1,500 Sustai ned 40 Rapi d
MK19 60 or more
Machi ne Gun 4 12 Tri pod 1,110 Bi pod Sustai ned 100
7.62MM M60E3 750 Rapi d 200
Anti -Tank Weapon X X 300 X
84MM M136 HEAT
AIII-1
APPENDIX IV
DECONTAMINANTS
Decontami nants i n thi s appendi x are grouped i n chemi cal , and bri ef di recti ons are gi ven on how to
tabl es accordi ng to thei r cl assi fi cati on of standard, prepare each decontami nant. The tabl es al so l i st
nonstandard, and natural . See Tabl es A-1 through A-3. any appropri ate cauti ons for each decontami nant.
Each decontami nant i s i denti fi ed by name and NSN A r emar ks col umn gi ves i nfor mati on on appl i -
(where appl i cabl e). Some i ncl ude pi ctures of the cati on, coverage, subsi tute sol uti ons, and the rel ated
decontami nant or i ts contai ner. The use of each effecti veness of the decontami nants.
decontami nant i s l i sted as nucl ear, bi ol ogi cal , and/or
Table A-1.Standard decontaminants
(Decontaminants most often used and available in supply system)
AIV-1
Table A-1.Standard decontaminantsContinued
(Decontaminants most often used are available in supply system)
AIV-2
Table A-2.NonStandard Decontaminants
(Decontaminants not frequently used)
AIV-3
Table A-2.NonStandard DecontaminantsContinued
AIV-4
AIV-5
AIV-6
AIV-7
AIV-8
Table A-3.Natural decontaminants.
(Decontaminants readily available and frequently occurring in nature.
AIV-9
APPENDIX V
Decontamination of Specific Items
Thi s appendi x l i sts more than two dozen speci fi c
parti cul ar surface or materi al i n a gi ven si tuati on
surfaces or materi al s, and expl ai ns bri efl y how to best
coul d be any of those l i sted for that surface or
decontami nate each for chemi cal , bi ol ogi cal , or
materi al . The order i n whi ch the methods are l i sted
nucl ear contami nati on. The best method of decon for a does not i ndi cate preference of one over another.
AV-1
AV-2
AV-3
AV-4
AV-5
APPENDIX VI
Work/Rest Table
AVI-1
APPENDIX VII
ACRONYMS
ACE
AO
BLT
BSSG
CARC
CE
CEOI
COC
CSS
CSSE
CSSOC
DAP
DASC
DECON
DED
DKI E
FDC
FMFM
DTD
FSC
FSCC
FSSG
GCE
GPM
LDS
LP
MAGTF
MAU
MAW
MAF
MEB
Avi ati on Combat El ement
Area of Operati ons
Battal i on Landi ng Team
Bri gade Servi ce Support Group
Chemi cal agent resi stant coati ng
Command El ement
Communi cati on El ectroni cs Operati ng I nstructi on
Combat Operati ons Center/Commaud
Combat Servi ce Support
Combat Servi ce Support El ement
Combat Servi ce Support Operati ons Center
Decontami nati ng apparatus
Di rect Ai r Support Center
Shortened form of decontami nati on
Detai l ed equi pment decon
Decon ki t, i ndi vi dual equi pment
Detai l ed troop decon
Fi re Di recti on Center
Fl eet Mari ne Force Manual
Fi re Support Coodi nati on/Coordi nator
Fi re Support Coordi nati on Center
Force Servi ce Support Group (USMC)
Ground Combat El ement
Gal l ons per mi nute
Li ghtwei ght decontami nati ng system
Li steni ng Post
Mari ne Amphi bi ous Force
Mari ne Ai r-Ground Task Force
Mari ne Amphi bi ous Uni t
Mari ne Ai rcraft Wi ng
Mari ne Expedi ti onary Bri gade
Mari ne Expedi ti onary Force MEF
AVII-1
MEU
MGX
MOPP
MSR
MSSG
OP
OPLAN
PDDA
OPSEC
PDDE
SD
STB
SOP
TOA
Mari ne Expedi ti onary Uni t
MOPP gear exchange
Mi ssi on-ori ented protecti ve posture
Mai n Suppl y Route
Mari ne amphi bi ous uni t servi ce
Observati on Post
Oper ati onal Pl an
M12A1 power-dri ven decon apparatus
Operati ons Securi ty
Power-dri ven decon equi pment
Ski n decontami nati on
Supertropi cal bl each
Standi ng operati ng procedures
Tabl e of Al l owance
AVII-2
APPENDIX VIII
REFERENCES USED TO DEVELOP
THIS TRAMAN
Chapter 1
Communications, FMFM 3-30, Uni ted States Mari ne Corps Combat Devel opment
Command, Quanti co, VA, 1989.
MAGTF Rear Area Security, FMFM 2-6, Uni ted States Mari ne Corps Combat
Devel opment Command, Quanti co, VA, 1991.
Marine Division, FMFM 6-1, Uni ted States Mari ne Corps Combat Devel opment
Command Quanti co, VA, 1978.
Chapter 2
Fundamentals of Defense, Part One, I NO416, Uni ted States Army, Fort Benni ng,
GA, 1988.
Marine Rifle Company Platoon, FMFM 6-4, Uni ted States Mari ne Corps Combat
Chapter 3
Marine Corps I nstitute, MCI 7006, Uni ted States Mari ne Corps Combat
Marine Rifle Squad, FMFM 6-5, Uni ted States Mari ne COrps Combat Devel opment
Chapter 4
Marine Corps I nstitute, MCI 7005A, Mari ne Corps Combat Devel opment
Command, Quanti co, VA.
Marine Division, FMFM 6-1, Uni ted States Mari ne Corps Combat Devel opment
Marine Rifle Company Platoon, FMFM 64, Uni ted States Mari ne Corps Combat
Marine Rifle Squad, FMFM 6-5, Uni ted States Mari ne Corps Combat Devel opment
Command, Quanti co, VA ,1991.
Small Unit Leaders Guide to Weather and Terrain, FMFRP 0-51, Mari ne Corps
Combat Devel opment Command, Quanti co, VA 1990.
AVIII-1
Chapter 5
Motor Transport, FMFM 4-9, Uni ted States Mari ne Corps Combat Devel opment
Chapter 6
NBC Decontamination, FM 3-5, Headquarters Department of the Army, Uni ted
States Mari ne Corps, Washi ngton, DC, 1993.
AVIII-2
I NDEX
A company fi re pl an, 4-25
Ai r attacks, 5-6
acti ve defense agai nst ai rcraft, 5-7
passi ve acti ons to ai r attacks, 5-9
Ambush, 5-1
ambush defense for a bl ocked road, 5-5
ambush defense for an unbl ocked road, 5-5
characteri sti cs of vehi cul ar ambush, 5-1
organi zati on of occupants, 5-1
preparati on of vehi cl es, 5-1
C
CEOI , 1-11
Combat operati on center, 1-6
boards and maps, 1-10
communi cati on pl an, 1-10
l ocati on, 1-7
operati on, 1-14
organi zati on, 1-8
personnel and thei r duti es, 1-8
Company command post, 2-1
charts and maps, 2-2
communi cati on network, 2-3
communi cati on pl an, 2-3
communi cati on requi rements, 2-3
communi cati ons, 2-1
l ocati on consi derati ons, 2-1
messages, i ncomi ng, 2-5
messages, outgoi ng, 2-5
operati on of, 2-5
personnel and thei r duti es, 2-2
reporti ng procedures, 2-5
Convoy, 5-1
convoy arm si ngl es, 5-3
convoy commander, 5-2
convoy defense for sni per fi re, 5-6
convoy defense, mi nes, and booby traps, 5-5
Crew-served weapons, 4-12
.50 cal i ber machi ne gun, 4-14
.60mm mortar empl oyment, 4-16
AT4 anti tank weapon, 4-14
AT4 empl oyment, 4-16
AT4 sectors of fi re, 4-16
AT4 suppl ementary mi ssi on, 4-17
M19 grenade l auncher, 4-14
M60E3 machi ne gun, 4-14
machi ne gun communi cati on, 4-15
machi ne gun empl oyment, 4-14
machi ne gun fi nal protecti ve l i nes, 4-15
machi ne gun pri nci pl e di recti on of fi re, 4-15
machi ne gun sector of fi re, 4-15
machi ne gun suppl ementary mi ssi ons, 4-17
D
Defensi ve areas, 4-1
forward defense area, 4-2
r eser ve ar ea, 4-2
securi ty area, 4-1
Detai l ed equi pment confi gurati on, 6-28
Detai l ed equi pment decon, 6-26
Detai l ed troop decon, 6-20
F
Fi ghti ng posi ti ons, 4-6
al ternate, 4-6
battl e, 4-6
pri mary, 4-6
suppl ementary, 4-6
Fi re team i n the defense, 4-7
automati c ri fl eman, 4-8
fi re pl an, 4-7
fi re pl an sketch, 4-8
fi re team l eader, 4-8
grenadi er, 4-8
i ndi vi dual fi ghti ng posi ti on, 4-7
INDEX-1
Fi re team i n the defenseConti nued
i ndi vi dual sectors of fi re, 4-7
ri fl eman, 4-8
Force servi ce support group mi l i tary pol i ce, 1-6
I
I mmedi ate acti on dri l l s, 5-10
counter ambush dri l l , 5-11
freeze and hasty ambush dri l l , 5-11
i mmedi ate assaul t dri l l , 5-11
vehi cl e unl oadi ng dri l l , 6-7
I mmedi ate decon operati ons, 6-7
L
Landi ng poi nts, 3-1
Landi ng si gnal man enl i sted (LSE) si gnal s, 3-4
Landi ng si te, 3-1
Landi ng zone bri ef, 3-5
Landi ng zone (LZ), 3-1
approaches and exi ts, 3-1
gradi ent (sl opes), 3-2
ground obstacl es, 3-2
marki ng the l andi ng zone, 3-2
surface condi ti ons, 3-2
Level s of decontami nati on, 6-6
i mmedi ate decon, 6-6
operati onal decon, 6-6
thorough decon, 6-6
M
Medi cal evacuati on request, 3-7
Medevac procedures, 3-7
ambul ance, 3-9
battal i on ai d stati on, 3-9
casual ti es, 3-10
establ i shi ng communi cati on, 3-10
l andi ng and l oadi ng the hel i copter, 3-10
l i tter bearers, 3-7
securi ng the l andi ng zone, 3-10
O
Operati onal decon, 6-11
organi zati on of the Mari ne ai r-ground task force, 1-1
avi ati on combat el ement, 1-2
combat servi ce support el ement, 1-2
command el ement, 1-2
ground combat el ement, 1-2
separate task organi zati on, 1-2
P
Pl atoon i n the defense, 4-10
depth, 4-11
frontage, 4-10
organi zi ng the pl atoon i n the defense, 4-12
pl atoon fi re pl an sketch, 4-11
securi ty area, 4-11
Previ si onal securi ty forces, 1-5
Provi si onal mobi l e securi ty pl atoons, 1-5
R
Range cards, 4-17
range card for a FPL, 4-20
range card for a PDF, 4-20
range card symbol s, 4-18
Rear area securi ty, 1-4
rear area operati on center (RAOC), 1-5
rear area securi ty coodi nator (RASC), 1-5
Reports, 2-5
SALUTE report, 2-6
SPOT report, 2-7
S
Sector of fi re, 4-5
forward l i mi ts, 4-5
l ateral l i mi ts, 4-5
Squad i n the defense, 4-8
automati c ri fl es, 4-9
fi re team posi ti ons, 4-9
squad fi re pl an, 4-8
squad fi re pl an sketch, 4-9
squad l eader posi ti on, 4-9
Stakes, 4-22
INDEX-2
T
Thorough decon operati on, 6-18
Types of MAGTFs, 1-2
Mari ne expedi ti onary force (MEF), 1-4
Types of MAGTFsConti nued
Mari ne expedi ti onay force forward (MEFF-F),
1-3
Mari ne expedi ti onary uni t (MEU), 1-2
INDEX-3

Seabee Combat Manual Vol 2

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Seabee Combat Manual Vol 2

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A: Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.

Você também pode gostar